Bosch Catalog - Edition 2014

Bosch Motorsport
Equipment for High Performance Vehicles

Edition 2014
Contacts
Europe
Bosch Engineering GmbH
Motorsport
Robert-Bosch-Allee 1
74232 Abstatt
Germany
Tel. +49 7062 911 79101
Fax +49 7062 911 79104
United Kingdom
Robert Bosch Ltd.
Motorsports
Broadwater Park, North Orbital Road
Denham, Uxbridge
Middlesex UB9 5HJ
United Kingdom
Tel. +44 1895 838 929
Fax +44 1895 839 019
France
Robert Bosch France S.A.S.
Motorsport
32, avenue Michelet
B.P. 170
F 93404 Saint-Ouen Cedex
France
Tel. +33 1 40 10 77 14
Fax +33 1 40 10 76 88
North and South America
Bosch Engineering North America
Motorsports
38000 Hills Tech Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331-3417
United States of America
Tel. +1 248 876 2977
Fax +1 248 876 7373
Asia Pacific
Bosch Engineering K.K.
Motorsport Department
18F Queens Tower C, 2-3-5- Minato Mirai
Nishi-ku, Yokohama-shi
Kanagawa 220-6218
Japan
Tel. +81 45 650 5610
Fax +81 45 650 5611
Australia and New Zealand
Robert Bosch Pty. Ltd
1555 Centre Road
Clayton, Victoria, 3168
Australia
Tel. +61 (3) 9541 3901
Fax +61 (3) 9541 7225
motor.sport@au.bosch.com
For more information please visit
www.bosch-motorsport.com or send an email to
motorsport@bosch.com
Bosch Engineering GmbH, 2013
Modifications reserved.
Warning: It is strictly forbidden to use Bosch Motorsport
products on public roads. They are only developed for use
in racing on private closed courses!

Engine Control Units

1
Injection and Ignition

2
Alternators and Starters

3
Sensors

4
Brake Control

5
Displays

6
Data Logging Systems

7
Software

8
Accessories

9
Appendix

10

Engine Control Units 9
Gasoline Engine Control Units 10

Engine Control Units Sport Line 11
Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport 14
Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport GT3 Cup 16
Engine Control Unit MS 4 Sport 18
Engine Control Units Performance Line 21
Engine Control Unit MS 5.0 24

Diesel Engine Control Units 32

Engine Control Unit MS 12 37

Injection and Ignition 39
Diesel System Components 40


Electronic Throttle Body 43


Fuel Pressure Regulators 46

Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini/Mini M 46
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini A 49
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini 38 51
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini 5 54
FPR Adaptor 57
HP Control Valve DSV 59

Fuel Pumps 61

Fuel Pump FP 100 61
Fuel Pump FP 165 63
Fuel Pump FP 200 65
Fuel Pump FP 300 67
Fuel Pump FP 300L 69
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-FCV/-FCV HP 71
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-FD 73
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-LW 74

HP Injection Power Stages 75

HPI 1.1 75
HPI 5 76
HPI 5-M 4C 77
HPI 5-M 8C 79

Ignition Coils 81

Single Fire Coil PS 81
Single Fire Coil PS-T 84
Single Fire Coil P35 87
Single Fire Coil P35-T 90
Single Fire Coil P35-E8 93
Single Fire Coil P35-TE8 98
Single Fire Coil P50/P50-M 104
Single Fire Coil P65 107
Single Fire Coil P65-T 110
Twin Single Fire Coil 2x1 125
Double Fire Coil 2x2 128
Double Fire Coil 3x2 131
Single Fire Coil S19 134
Single Fire Coil S22/S22-T 137
Single Fire Coil C90i-pro 140
Single Fire Coil C90i-E8 143
Single Fire Coil C90i-E10 146

Ignition Modules 149

Ignition Module IM 3.1 149
Ignition Module IM 3.2 151
Ignition Module IM 4 153

Injection Valves 155

Injection Valve EV 6 155
Injection Valve EV 14i 169
HP Injection Valve HDEV 5.2 172
HP Injection Valve HDEV 5.2 LC 174

Alternators and Starters 177
Alternators 178

Alternator 90 A 178
Alternator B3 180
Alternator B3 LIN 183
Alternator GCM1 186

Starters 190

Starter 1.4 kW 190
Starter 1.7 kW 192
Starter 2.0 kW 194

Sensors 197
Absolute Position Sensor 198

Absolute Position Sensor APS-C 198

Table of contents | 5

Current Sensor 200

Current Sensor CS 240 200

Dynamic Vehicle Sensors 202

Acceleration Sensor AM 600-2 202
Acceleration Sensor AM 600-3 204
Acceleration Sensor MM5.10 206
Lean Angle Sensor LAS-1 209
Yaw Rate Sensor YRS 3 212

Gear Shift Sensor 215

Gear Shift Sensor GSS-2 215

Knock Sensors 217

Knock Sensor KS-P 217
Knock Sensor KS-R 219

Lambda Sensors 221

Lambda Sensor LSU 4.2 221
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.9 224
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.9D 227
Lambda Sensor Mini-LSU 4.9 230

Linear Potentiometers 233

Linear Potentiometer LP 10 233
Linear Potentiometer LP 25 twin 237
Linear Potentiometer LP 50 twin 241
Linear Potentiometer LP 75F 245
Linear Potentiometer LP 100F 249

Pressure Sensors Air 253

Pressure Sensor Air PSA-B 253
Pressure Sensor Air PSA-C 256
Pressure Sensor Air PSB-2 259
Pressure Sensor Air PSB-4 262
Pressure Sensor Air PSP 264
Pressure Sensor Air PST 266

Pressure Sensors Fluid 269

Pressure Sensor Fluid PSC-10 269
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSC-260 271
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSM 273
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSM-S 275
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-10 277
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-10R 279
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-260 285
Pressure Sensor Fluid PST-F 287
Pressure Sensor Fluid PST-F 2 290

Rotary Potentiometers 293

Rotary Potentiometer Mini-RP 100-M 293
Rotary Potentiometer RP 50-M/130-M/350-M 295
Rotary Potentiometer RP 55 297
Rotary Potentiometer RP 86 299
Rotary Potentiometer RP 100/130/308 301
Rotary Potentiometer RP 100 twin 303
Rotary Potentiometer RP 345-M 305
Rotary Potentiometer RP 360-H 307

Speed Sensors 309

Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-P 309
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-P2 311
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor Mini-HA-P 313
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor Mini-HA-P sealed 317
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-M 319
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-D 90 321
Inductive Speed Sensor IA-C 323
Inductive Speed Sensor IA 325
Inductive Speed Sensor IS 327
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-C 329
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-T 331

Temperature Sensors 333

Temperature Sensor NTC M5-HS 333
Temperature Sensor NTC M6-H 335
Temperature Sensor NTC M12 341
Temperature Sensor NTC M12-H 343
Temperature Sensor NTC M12-L 345
Temperature Sensor PT 200E 347
Temperature Sensors Infrared TI-16-r/-s 349
Temperature Sensors Infrared TI-100-s/-c 351

Thermocouple Probes 353

Thermocouple Probe TCP K 353
Thermocouple Probe TCP KA 355
Thermocouple Probe TCP KN 2 358

6 | Table of contents

Wire Potentiometers 360

Wire Potentiometer WP 35 360

Brake Control 373
ABS 374

ABS M4 Kit 374

Displays 377
Displays 378

Display DDU 7 378
Display DDU 8 380

Data Logging Systems 383
Data Loggers 384

Data Logger C 50 384
Data Logger C 60 386
Upgrade USB 388

Lap Trigger Systems 390

Lap Trigger HF 58 Receiver 390
Lap Trigger HF 58 Transmitter 392
Lap Trigger IR-02 Receiver 393
Lap Trigger IR-02 Transmitter 394

Sensor Interfaces 395

CAN Module 395
Extended Module EM-LIN 397
Lambdatronic LT4 399
Modular Sensor Interface M 60 402
Wheel Speed Signal Splitter 404

Telemetry 407

Online Telemetry System Overview 407
Telemetry Unit FM 40 409
Pit Receiver Box 410
Pit Receiver Package 411
Burst Telemetry System Overview 412
Burst Telemetry Pit Module BR 60F 414
Burst Telemetry Car Module BT 60F 415

Telemetry Accessories 416

FM 40 Tester 416
Telemetry Antenna Dummy Load 417
Telemetry Car Antenna Single Band 418
Antenna Cable Kit 419

Software 421
Calibration 422

Modas Sport 422
RaceCon 423

Simulation 424

LapSim 424

Analysis 426

WinDarab V7 426

Software Upgrades 428

CAN Bypass 428
MSD Partitioning 429

Accessories 431
Communication Interface 432

MSA-Box II 432

Connector Opening Tool 433

Connector Opening Tool for AS series 433

PowerBox 434

PowerBox PBX 180 434

Relay 438

Relay 25 A 438

Switches 440

Switches 440

Wiper Motor 441

Wiper Direct Actuator WDA 441

Wiring Harnesses 444


Appendix 445
General Information 446


Vibration Profiles 447

Vibration Profile 1 447

Table of contents | 7

8 | Table of contents

Engine Control Units 1

Gasoline Engine Control Units 10

Diesel Engine Control Units 32

Gasoline Engine Control Units
Sport Line ECUs
Type Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport
GT3 Cup
Engine Control Unit MS 4 Sport

Max. Cyl./bank 6/2 6/2 8[GDI 6]/2
Control strategy Alpha/n Alpha/n Alpha/n
Lambda ctrl Dual Dual Dual
Turbo boost ctrl - - Opt.
Knock ctrl Opt. + Opt.
El. Throttle ctrl Opt. + Opt.
Traction ctrl Opt. + Opt.
GDI support - - Opt.
Proposed logger C 50 C 50 C 50
Proposed display DDU 7 DDU 7 DDU 7
Performance Line ECUs
Type Engine Control Unit
MS 5.0
Engine Control Unit
MS 5.1
Engine Control Unit
MS 5.5
Engine Control Unit
MS 5.2

Max. Cyl./bank 8/2 8/2 8/2 12/2
Control strategy Torque-structure based Torque structure based Torque structure based Torque structure based
Lambda ctrl Dual Dual Dual Dual
Turbo boost ctrl + + + +
Knock ctrl + + + +
El. Throttle ctrl + + + +
Traction ctrl + + + +
GDI support + + + +
Proposed logger C 60 C 60 Integrated 2 GB logger C 60
Proposed display DDU 8 DDU 8 DDU 8 DDU 8
10 | Engine Control Units | Gasoline Engine Control Units

1
Engine Control Units Sport
Line
The Sport Line introduces a simple and competitive
start in the world of engine control units from Bosch
Motorsport. In comparison with the Performance Line
ECUs from Bosch Motorsport, the Sport Line devices
have an optimized function range that make the initial
start-up process much simpler.
The Sport Line has three different hardware platforms
that vary in their amount of inputs/outputs and function-
ality that provide the optimal ECU to be selected for a
given projects requirements. Additionally, each ECU in
the Sport Line can be tailored to support certain project
needs through various software options. To complete
the entire entry level system, Bosch Motorsport offers
the display unit DDU 7 and the external data logger
C 50.
Example for a typical Sport Line system
Depicted below is an example system layout for the
ECUs of the Sport Line. The ECU is calibrated with the
Modas Sport software. The communication interface
MSA-Box II connects to the PC over USB and to the ECU
via a CAN/K-Line link. The display DDU 7 is configured
over Ethernet with the software RaceCon. The ECU
sends the desired measured variables to the display/
logger via CAN interface or Ethernet. These variables
can be displayed for the driver or logged for analysis.
Downloading and analyzing the data is also accomplish-
ed over Ethernet with the WinDarab software.
Engine Control Units | Gasoline Engine Control Units | 11

1
Dimensions

1
Sport Line ECUs
Type Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport
GT3 Cup

Max. Cyl./bank 6/2 6/2 8[GDI 6]/2
Control strategy Alpha/n Alpha/n Alpha/n
Lambda ctrl Dual Dual Dual
Turbo boost ctrl - - Opt.
Knock ctrl Opt. + Opt.
El. Throttle ctrl Opt. + Opt.
Traction ctrl Opt. + Opt.
GDI support - - Opt.
Proposed logger C 50 C 50 C 50
Proposed display DDU 7 DDU 7 DDU 7

1
Engine Control Unit MS 3
Sport
Features
u Full hybrid technology
u 6 injection output stages
u 6 ignition output stages
u 34 data inputs
The MS 3 Sport is the first Bosch engine management
system to be manufactured with full hybrid technology.
Therefore it is very small, lightly and robust against vi-
brations. The MS 3 Sport is suitable for engines with up
to 6 cylinders and has internal ignition output stages.
Two sensor inputs are available for vibration knock de-
tection and knock control. Various engine parameters
can be measured with different input channels and
transferred via CAN interface to an optional data logger
or dash display.
Application
Engine layout Max. 6 cyl., 2 bank
Control strategy Alpha/n
Lambda control Dual
Speed limiter
Gear cut for sequential gear box
Map switch, 3 positions, each corresponds to different target lambda
and spark maps.
Fuel cut off
Sequential fuel injection
Asymmetric injection timing
Asymmetric ignition timing
Knock control Optional
Electronic throttle control Optional
Traction control Optional
Interface to Bosch Motorsport ABS M4 kit
Support of 60-2 and 36-2 ignition trigger wheels
Max. vibration Vibration Profile 3 (see Appen-
dix or www.bosch-motor-
sport.com)
Technical Specifications
Mechanical Data
Extremely small and flat aluminum pressure casting housing
4 mounting points on housing
2 connectors with high pin density
Extremely shock and vibration proof hybrid technology
Size 120 x 90 x 40 mm
Weight 250 g
Temperature range -40 to 125C
Electrical Data
Max. power consumption 10 W at 14 V
Power supply
Full operation 9 to 16 V
Recommended 11 to 14 V
Inputs
2 lambda interfaces LSU
4 inputs for Hall-effect wheel speed sensors
1 input for inductive crankshaft sensor
1 input for Hall-effect camshaft sensor
2 knock sensor inputs
Outputs
6 injection power stages
6 ignition power stages (7.5 to 8.0 A)
8 power stages (2 A/1 A; low side; PWM)
2 power stages for lambda heater
1 H-bridge (5 A)
2 sensor supplies 5 V/100 mA
Software
Modas Sport Calibration Soft-
ware
Inclusive
WinDarab Analysis Software On request
Optional Functionality
Knock Control SW upgrade F 01T A20 053-01
Electronic Throttle Control SW
upgrade
F 01T A20 051-01

1
Traction Control SW upgrade F 01T A20 052-01
Variable Valve Timing VVT SW
upgrade
F 02U V00 395-01
Environment (not included)
Programming interface MSA-
Box II
F 02U V00 327-02
Data logger C 50 F 02U V01 164-01
Display DDU 7 F 02U V01 130-01
Mating connectors (not included)
Mating connector I D 261 205 139-01
Mating connector II D 261 205 140-01
Communication
1 K-line serial interface
1 CAN interface
Ordering Information
Please ask for more information before ordering.
Order number F 01T A20 067-01
Software Options
SW Upgrade Traction Control
SW Upgrade Knock Control
SW Upgrade El. Throttle Control


1
Sport GT3 Cup
Features
u Free and full access to the ECU
u No wiring changes necessary
u Support for 3rd party displays via CAN
u Plug and play with base safe calibration
u Pre-configured workbases for free Bosch Motor-
sport calibration tools
The MS 3 Sport GT3 Cup Motorsports ECU enables you
to optimize the software of Ex-Porsche GT3 Cup cars by
getting full access to the ECU, allowing you to adapt it
to any engine hardware changes. The software offers ad-
ditional features and comes with a base calibration.
Application
Lambda control Dual
Speed limiter
and spark maps.
Fuel cut off
Knock control Inclusive
Electronic throttle control Inclusive
Traction control Inclusive
Interface to Bosch Motorsport ABS M4 kit
Support of 60-2 and 36-2 ignition trigger wheels
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Extremely small and flat aluminum pressure casting housing
4 mounting points on housing
2 connectors with high pin density
Extremely shock and vibration proof hybrid technology
Size 120 x 90 x 40 mm
Weight 250 g
Electrical Data
Power supply
Inputs
Outputs
6 ignition power stages (7.5 to 8.0 A)
8 power stages (2 A/1 A; low side; PWM)
1 H-bridge (5 A)
Software
ware
Inclusive
Box II
F 02U V00 327-02

1
Communication
1 CAN interface
Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport GT3 Cup
Delivery with Porsche GT3 specific base calibration.
Order number F 02UV0U 082-01


1
Engine Control Unit
MS 4 Sport
Features
u 8 ignition drivers
u 35 data inputs
The MS 4 Sport is an engine management system for
high performance engines up to 8 cylinders. The system
contains 8 ignition drivers for external power stages and
8 independent injection power stages. Two independent
wide range lambda circuits allow lambda closed loop
engine control. There are also versions for Turbo and
GDI engines as well as for Turbo GDI engines available.
Various engine parameters can be measured with differ-
ent input channels and transferred via CAN interface to
an optional data logger.
Application
Lambda control Dual
Speed limiter
and spark maps.
Fuel cut off
Turbo boost control
Ignition trigger wheels Support of 60-2 and 36-2
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Sheet-metal housing
Each connector pin individually filtered
Vibration damped circuit boards
Size 180 x 162 x 46 mm
Weight 430 g
Electrical Data
Power supply
Inputs
25 universal inputs 0 to 5 V
Outputs
8 ignition drivers
10 power stages (2,7 A/0,6 A; low side; PWM)
1 H-bridge (5 A)
Software
ware
Inclusive
Advanced Turbo boost control F 02U V00 781-01
Knock control SW upgrade F 01T A20 053-01
Electronic throttle control SW
upgrade
F 01T A20 051-01
Electronic throttle control incl.
shift down (Blipper) SW up-
grade, also compatible to MEGA-
Line gear box control
F 02U V00 780-01
Traction control SW upgrade F 01T A20 052-01
Variable Valve Timing VVT SW
upgrade
F 02U V00 395-01

1
Box II
F 02U V00 327-02
Injection power stage unit HPI 5 F 02U V00 929-01
HP fuel pump HDP 5 Diff. variations available
Installation Notes
Depending on your experiences with calibration of ECUs we recom-
mend calibration support from Bosch Motorsport.
Please remember that the mating connectors and the programming in-
terface MSA-Box II are not included and must be ordered separately.
Communication
2 CAN interfaces for external communication
Engine Control Unit MS 4 Sport GDI
Only in combination with HPI 5
Order number F 02U V01 138-01
Engine Control Unit MS 4 Sport Turbo
Engine Control Unit MS 4 Sport Turbo GDI
Only in combination with HPI 5
Engine Control Unit MS 4 Sport Motorcycle
Software Options
SW Upgrade Knock Control
SW Upgrade El. Throttle Control
SW Upgrade Advanced Turbo Control
SW Upgrade Variable Valve Timing
SW Upgrade ETC & Blipper

1
MS 4 Sport Variations
MS 4 Sport
Engine Control Unit
MS 4 Sport GDI
Engine Control Unit
MS 4 Sport Turbo
Engine Control Unit
MS 4 Sport Turbo
GDI
Engine Control Unit
MS 4 Sport Motorcy-
cle

Max. Cyl./bank 8/2 6/2 8/2 6/2 4/2
GDI support - + - + -
ABS M4 interface + + + + -
Turbo boost ctrl - - + + -
Advanced turbo
boost ctrl
- - - Opt. Opt.
Knock ctrl Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. -
El. Throttle ctrl Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. -
El. Throttle ctrl incl.
shift down (Blipper)
Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. -
Traction ctrl Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. -
Var. valve timing Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. -

1
Engine Control Units
Performance Line
The ECUs of the Performance Line offers individual solu-
tions for various motorsport applications. All MS 5 ECUs
utilize a new software development process based on
MATLAB & Simulink to significantly speed algorithm
development. They also feature a high-end FPGA (Field
Programmable Gate Array) for fast signal processing and
flexible signal control. A PowerPC enables highly sophis-
ticated control algorithms. Consistent software struc-
ture guarantees easy recognition of all software labels
and functions across the complete ECU Performance
Line. It is completed by use of the DDU 8 display and
the C 60 external data logger.
The ECUs in the Performance Line use torque as the
central variable for coordinating all requests (i.e. en-
gine/vehicle speed limiter, traction control, etc.). The
actual engine torque value is determined from the cor-
recting variables (air charge, ignition angle, and/or cylin-
der reduction via fuel cut) by means of a torque model.
This is then compared to the desired engine torque val-
ue to determine if any modification of the engine torque
is needed. This results in a precise and adaptable con-
trol of the engine.
Example for a typical Performance Line system
Depicted below you see an example system layout for
the Performance Line. The ECU is calibrated with the
software Modas Sport. The communication interface
MSA-Box II connects to the PC over USB and to the ECU
via a CAN/Ethernet link. DDU 8 display and C 60 data
logger are configured over Ethernet with the software
RaceCon. The logger and the ECU communicate over
Ethernet. Downloading and analyzing the data is accom-
plished with the data analysis software WinDarab. The
data can be also transmitted over burst or online tele-
metry.

1
Dimensions

1
Performance Line ECUs
MS 5.0
Engine Control Unit
MS 5.1
Engine Control Unit
MS 5.5
Engine Control Unit
MS 5.2

Max. Cyl./bank 8/2 8/2 8/2 12/2
Control strategy Torque-structure based Torque structure based Torque structure based Torque structure based
Lambda ctrl Dual Dual Dual Dual
Turbo boost ctrl + + + +
Knock ctrl + + + +
El. Throttle ctrl + + + +
Traction ctrl + + + +
GDI support + + + +
Proposed logger C 60 C 60 Integrated 2 GB logger C 60
Proposed display DDU 8 DDU 8 DDU 8 DDU 8

1
Engine Control Unit MS 5.0
Features
u 51 data inputs
The MS 5.0 engine control unit manages gasoline en-
gines up to 8 cylinders. As a member of our MS 5 family,
it features a powerful digital processing core with float-
ing point arithmetic and a high-end FPGA for ultimate
performance and flexibility. The MS 5 family utilizes a
new software development process based on MATLAB/
Simulink, which significantly speeds algorithm develop-
ment by using automatic code and documentation gen-
eration. Custom functions can be quickly and easily gen-
erated. The flexible hardware design allows the MS 5.0
to support complex or unusual engine or chassis config-
urations.
Application
Control strategy Torque-structure based
Lambda control With adaptation function
Speed limiter
and spark maps.
Fuel cut off
Turbo boost control
Knock control
Electronic throttle control
Traction control
Calibration interface CCP via CAN or XCP via Ethernet
Interface to Bosch Data Logging System
Max. Vibration Vibration Profile 1 (see Appen-
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
2 high pin density motorsport connectors
132 pins, each pin individually filtered
Size 140 x 109 x 40.5 mm
Weight 650 g
Protection Classification IP67 to DIN 40050, Section 9,
Issue 2008
Temp. range (at internal sen-
sors)
-20 to 85C
Electrical Data
Approx. power cons. (w/o loads) 9 W at 14 V
Power supply
Full operation 6.5 to 18 V
Absolute maximum 6 to 24 V
Inputs
2 thermocouple exhaust gas temperature sensors
2 lambda interfaces (LSU 4.9)
1 crankshaft sensor (2-wire, inductive or Hall-effect)
1 camshaft sensor (2-wire, inductive or Hall-effect)
4 wheel speed sensors (inductive or Hall-effect)
32 universal analog inputs 0 to 5 V, 12 Bit
4 analog inputs (angle synchronous or time synchronous triggering up
to 250 ksps, 12 Bit)
2 inputs for vibration knock sensors
1 lap trigger input
Outputs
8 ignition power stages (up to 10 A)
12 power stages (2 A; low side; PWM)
1 H-bridge (5 A)
1 time based synch-in/out

1
Software
ware
Inclusive
Box II
F 02U V00 327-02
Mating connector blue
AS 6-18-35 SB
F 02U 000 474-01
Mating connector red
AS 6-18-35 SN
F 02U 000 472-01
Installation Notes
Communication
2 x 100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces
2 x 1 Mbps CAN interfaces

1
Features
u 59 data inputs
urations.
Application
Speed limiter
and spark maps.
Fuel cut off
Turbo boost control
Knock control
Traction control
Asymmetric injection timing Optional
Asymmetric ignition timing Optional
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
Vibration suppression via multipoint fixed circuit boards
Size 180 x 155 x 40 mm
Weight 1,060 g
Issue 2008
sors)
-20 to 85C
Electrical Data
Power cons. (w/o loads) Approx. 9 W at 14 V
Power supply
Operating range 6.5 to 18 V
Inputs
2 turbo speed sensors (2-wire, inductive or Hall-effect)
4 wheel speed sensors (inductive or Hall-effect)
4 analog inputs (angle synchronous or time synchronous triggering up
1 lap trigger input
Outputs
8 injection power stages (peak & hold)
2 H-bridges (5 A)
1 sensor supply 10 V/100 mA

1
1 protected Ubat output 1 A
6 diagnostic outputs with selectable internal signals
1 time base reference synch-in/out
Software
ware
Inclusive
Box II
F 02U V00 327-02
Mating connector yellow
AS 6-16-35 SA
F 02U 000 467-01
AS 6-16-35 SB
F 02U 000 468-01
AS 6-16-35 SN
F 02U 000 466-01
Installation Notes
Internal battery for data preservation included.
Required service interval 12 months (internal battery is replaced).
Communication
1 x RS232 serial interface
1 x LIN interface

1
Features
u Internal 2 GB datalogger
u 59 data inputs
urations.
The MS 5.5 has an internal 2 GB logger, presenting a
cost efficient and weight optimized all-in-one solution.
Application
Speed limiter
and spark maps.
Fuel cut off
Turbo boost control
Knock control
Traction control
Internal logger 2 GB
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
Vibration suppression via multipoint fixed circuit boards
Size 180 x 155 x 40 mm
Issue 2008
Weight (approx.) 1,270 g
sors)
-20 to 65C
Electrical Data
Approx. power cons. (w/o loads) 13 W at 14 V
Power Supply
Full operation 6.5 to 18 V
Inputs
4 wheel speed sensors (Inductive or Hall-effect)
4 analog inputs (Angle synchronous or time synchronous triggering up
1 lap trigger input
Outputs

1
2 H-bridges (5 A)
3 sensor supplies 5 V/400 mA and 1 x 10 V/100 mA
1 protected Ubat output 1 A
1 time based synch-in/out
Software
ware
Inclusive
Box II
F 02U V00 327-02
AS 6-16-35 SA
F 02U 000 467-01
AS 6-16-35 SB
F 02U 000 468-01
AS 6-16-35 SN
F 02U 000 466-01
Installation Notes
Communication
1 x LIN interface

1
Features
u 78 data inputs
gines up to 12 cylinders. As a member of our MS 5 fami-
ly, it features a powerful digital processing core with
floating point arithmetic and a high-end FPGA for ulti-
mate performance and flexibility. The MS 5 family uti-
lizes a new software development process based on
MATLAB/Simulink, which significantly speeds algorithm
development by using automatic code and documenta-
tion generation. Custom functions can be quickly and
easily generated. The flexible hardware design allows
the MS 5.2 to support complex or unusual engine or
chassis configurations.
Application
Speed limiter
and spark maps.
Fuel cut off
Turbo boost control
Knock control
Traction control
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
Vibration resistant circuit board mounting
Size 200 x 170 x 36.5 mm
Weight (approx.) 1,260 g
Issue 2008
sors)
-20 to 85C
Electrical Data
Power cons. (w/o loads) Approx. 10 W at 14 V
Power supply
Operating range 6.5 to 18 V
Absolute maximum 6 to24 V
Inputs
4 wheel speed sensors (Inductive or Hall-effect)
2 gearbox speed sensor (Inductive or Hall-effect)
14 analog inputs (Angle synchronous or time synchronous triggering
up to 250 ksps, 12 Bit)
1 lap trigger input
Outputs
12 injection power stages (Peak & hold)
12 ignition power stages (Up to 20 A)
4 H-bridge valve drivers ( 100 mA)
2 H-bridges (5 A)

1
4 sensor supplies 3 x 5 V/400 mA and 1 x 10 V/100 mA
12 outputs with configurable function (FPGA)
1 time base reference synch-in/out
Software
ware
Inclusive
Box II
F 02U V00 327-02
AS 6-16-35 SA
F 02U 000 467-01
AS 6-16-35 SB
F 02U 000 468-01
Mating connector orange
AS 6-16-35 SC
F 02U 000 469-01
AS 6-16-35 SN
F 02U 000 466-01
Installation Notes
Communication

1
Diesel ECUs
Type Engine Control Unit MS 15.1 Engine Control Unit MS 15.2 Engine Control Unit MS 12

Max. Cyl. 8 6 12
Injector types Solenoid injectors Piezo injectors Piezo injectors
Control strategy Quantity based Quantity based Quantity based
Injections Max. 5 Max. 4 Max. 4
Inputs/Outputs 60/32 60/30 75/52
Turbo boost control system Single or twin turbo Single or twin turbo Single or twin turbo
Lambda measurement + + +
Traction control system Optional Optional +
Weight 1,780 g 1,780 g 2,500 g
32 | Engine Control Units | Diesel Engine Control Units

1
Features
u For solenoid injectors
u 60 data inputs
The MS 15.1 is an ECU for Diesel engines with up to 8
cylinders. It is developed for use with Bosch solenoid in-
jectors.
Application
Engines with the following num-
bers of cylinders are supported:
3, 4, 5, 6, 8, < 3 on request
Injector type Solenoid injectors
Control strategy Quantity based
Injection timing 2 pilot injections
2 main injections
1 post injection
Turbo boost control Single or Bi-Turbo
Lambda measurement
Speed limiter
Gear cut for sequential gearbox
Speed limiter
Optional function packages available
Max. vibration Vibration profile 1 (see Appen-
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
4 connectors in motorsport technology with high pin density,
187 pins
8 housing fixation points
Size 210 x 199 x 36 mm
Issue 2008
Weight 1,780 g
Electrical Data
Power consumption w/o inj. Approx. 5 W at 14 V
Power consumption Approx. 140 W at 14 V
Inputs
2 inputs for thermocouple exhaust gas temperature sensors
4 inputs for wheel speed sensors; basic design for inductive sensors
4 inputs for turbo speed sensors; basic design for inductive sensors
3 system inputs 0 to 5 V
13 universal inputs 0 to 5 V, fixed pull-up
27 universal inputs 0 to 5 V, switchable pull-up
3 digital inputs
Outputs
12 power stages (low side)
2 H-bridges
2 sensor supplies 5 V/system use
Software
ware
Inclusive
Traction control SW upgrade F 02U V00 778-01
Chassis SW upgrade F 02U V00 779-01
Two bank hydraulic control SW
upgrade
F 02U V00 949-01
Box II
F 02U V00 327-01
Engine Control Units | Diesel Engine Control Units | 33

1
Mating connector I
AS 6-16-35 SN
F 02U 000 466-01
Mating connector II
AS 6-16-35 SB
F 02U 000 468-01
Mating connector III
AS 6-16-35 SC
F 02U 000 469-01
Mating connector IV
AS 6-12-35 SD
F 02U 000 445-01
Installation Notes
Communication
3 CAN interfaces (dash, application, customer use)
2 FireWire interfaces for external communication
Software Options
SW Upgrade Chassis
SW Upgrade Two Bank Hydraulic Control

1
Features
u For Piezo injectors
u 60 data inputs
The MS 15.2 is an ECU for Diesel engines with up to 6
cylinders. It is developed for use with Bosch Piezo injec-
tors.
Application
Engines with the following num-
bers of cylinders are supported:
3, 4, 5 ,6, < 3 on request
Injector type Piezo injectors
1 main injection
1 post injection
Turbo boost control Single or Bi-Turbo
Lambda measurement
Speed limiter
Speed limiter
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
4 connectors in motorsport technology with high pin density,
187 pins
Size 210 x 199 x 36 mm
Issue 2008
Weight 1,780 g
Electrical Data
Power consumption Approx. 140 W at 14 V
Inputs
2 inputs for thermocouple exhaust gas temperature sensors
13 universal inputs 0 to 5 V, fixed pull-up
3 digital inputs
Outputs
12 power stages (low side)
2 H-bridges
Software
ware
Inclusive
Traction control SW upgrade F 02U V00 778-01
Chassis SW upgrade F 02U V00 779-01
Two bank hydraulic control SW
upgrade
F 02U V00 949-01
Box II
F 02U V00 327-01

1
Mating connector I
AS 6-16-35 SA
F 02U 000 467-01
Mating connector II
AS 6-16-35 SB
F 02U 000 468-01
AS 6-16-35 SC
F 02U 000 469-01
Mating connector IV
AS 6-12-35 SD
F 02U 000 445-01
Piezo Specific Functions
Voltage Control
Rail pressure dependent precontrol of the voltage difference between
cut off voltage and stationary actuator voltage.
Closed-loop voltage control, injector individual.
Voltage precontrol to improve dynamic behavior.
Discharging Time Control
Voltage dependent precontrol of discharging current.
Closed-loop discharging time control, injector individual.
Discharging time precontrol to improve dynamic behavior.
IVA Injector Voltage Adjustment
Determination of injector voltage demand at reference rail pressure
during injector inspection in plant before IQA-measurement.
Injector assignment of voltage setpoint curves within the ECU accord-
ing to injectors IVA class.
Temperature Compensation
Determination of the temperature dependent changes of voltage de-
mand.
Definition of a temperature dependent correction factor.
Multiplicative correction of the voltage setpoint.
Installation Notes
Communication
3 CAN interfaces (dash, application, customer use)
Software Options
SW Upgrade Chassis
SW Upgrade Two Bank Hydraulic Control

1
Features
u For piezo injectors
u 78 data inputs
The MS 12 is the high-end ECU for Diesel engines. This
ECU offers 12 Piezo injection power stages for use in up
to a 12 cylinder engine. Various engine and chassis pa-
rameters can be measured with a high number of input
channels. All measured data can be transferred via Fire-
Wire interface to an optional flash card data logger.
Gear box control strategies are optional.
Application
Engine layout Max. 12 cyl.
Injector type Piezo injectors
1 main injection
1 post injection
Turbo boost control (incl. VTG) Single or Twin-Turbo
Lambda measurement
Traction control
Launch control
Gearbox control
Speed limiter
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
5 connectors in motorsport technology with high pin density, 242
pins
Each connector individually filtered.
Size 240 x 200 x 57 mm
Issue 2008
Weight 2,500 g
Electrical Data
Power consumption at 6,500
rpm
Max. 160 W at 14 V
Inputs
6 inputs for thermocouple sensors (e.g. exhaust gas temperature)
2 gear box speeds
2 inputs for inductive crankshaft sensor
16 PT1000
3 digital inputs
2 LVDT sensor interfaces
1 SSI interface
Outputs
24 power stages low side
6 H-bridges
3 sensor supplies 5 V/300 mA or 10 V/100 mA
Software

1
Box II
F 02U V00 327-01
Mating connector I
AS 6-18-35 SA
F 02U 000 473-01
Mating connector II
AS 6-18-35 SB
F 02U 000 474-01
AS 6-18-35 SC
F 02U 000 475-01
Mating connector IV
AS 6-18-35 SN
F 02U 000 472-01
Mating connector V
AS 6-12-35 SD
F 02U 000 445-01
Piezo Specific Functions
Voltage Control
Rail pressure dependent precontrol of the voltage difference between
cut off voltage and stationary actuator voltage.
Closed-loop voltage control, injector individual.
Voltage precontrol to improve dynamic behavior.
Discharging Time Control
Voltage dependent precontrol of discharging current.
Closed-loop discharging time control, injector individual.
Discharging time precontrol to improve dynamic behavior.
IVA Injector Voltage Adjustment
Determination of injector voltage demand at reference rail pressure
during injector inspection in plant before IQA-measurement.
Injector assignment of voltage setpoint curves within the ECU accord-
ing to injectors IVA class.
Temperature Compensation
Determination of the temperature dependent changes of voltage de-
mand.
Definition of a temperature dependent correction factor.
Multiplicative correction of the voltage set point.
Installation Notes
Communication
2 K-line serial interfaces
5 CAN interfaces (dash, application, customer use, switchable CAN
load resistor)
Order number on request


1
Injection and Ignition 2



Fuel Pressure Regulators 46

Fuel Pumps 61

HP Injection Power Stages 75

Ignition Coils 81

Ignition Modules 149

Injection Valves 155

Diesel System Components
Features
u Modification of Common Rail systems
u Different modification levels available
u All hydraulic parts available
The geometry and characteristics of Diesel engine com-
ponents are more dependent upon the application than
those for gasoline engines. A single injector design will
not fit all Diesel engines due to varying mechanical and
nozzle geometry requirements. In addition, the injection
system can vary from year to year even within the same
make of car.
Bosch Motorsport uses the same Common Rail technol-
ogy for racing that was developed for production vehicle
applications. This includes both solenoid (magnetic)
technology and the latest cutting-edge piezo technology.
Bosch Motorsport can offer a wide variety of modifica-
tions to fit the system to your specifications. These
modifications include:
Definition of suitable base components from other
(or larger) engine applications.
Adaptation of components for mating, fit and orien-
tation to suit the selected application.
Flow enhancement of injectors and rails.
Injector nozzle adaptation (flow rate, number of
holes, spray cone angle etc.).
Our goal is to offer the best balance of cost and per-
formance for your application. This is why we offer dif-
ferent levels of modifications to choose from. Below is
an example of the different levels for a 4-cylinder engine
with 4 injectors, 1 high pressure pump and a single fuel
rail:
Installation Notes
When contacting us for more information on our Diesel
components, please have the following information
ready so that we may best determine components re-
quired for your application:
The base engine / the car where this engine original-
ly is installed
Model year and type of car / engine
The base output level and the desired output level
for the engine
If it is originally equipped with Bosch components:
the part numbers of the Bosch components
Alternatively the car / engine manufacturer part
number of the original injection system.
Notice
If your engine is originally equipped with Bosch
components, modifications will be easier than
replacing third party components.
Notice
We reserve the right to assess a fee for applica-
tions where the component specification re-
quires an extraordinary amount of time.
40 | Injection and Ignition | Diesel System Components

2
Dimensions
Common Rail
Pumps
CP1H, CP3, CP4
Rails Max. 6 cyl./bank
Pressure Sensors RDS Max. 2,400 bar
Injectors CRI 2 (Solenoid),
CRI 3 (Piezo)

Pressure Control
Valves
DRV Max. 2,400 bar
Injection and Ignition | Diesel System Components | 41

2
1st Level 2nd Level 3rd Level

Description Series components with minor
modifications (e.g. series compo-
nents from a bigger engine plus
series injector with sample nozzle)
Series components with modifica-
tions (e.g. modified injector body
with sample nozzle)
Components manufactured com-
pletely to your specification (e.g.
heavily modified series compo-
nents or new products)
Functioning Solenoid Piezo Piezo or Solenoid
Injectors 4 x 650.00 4 x 2,100.00 On request (Prices will be finalized
in your personal offer once part
numbers are defined)
High pressure pump 1,250.00 3,000.00
Fuel rail Approx. 500.00 Approx. 1,000.00
System price 4,350.00 12,400.00
Bosch Motorsport does not manufacture high pressure fuel lines, but we can assist you in finding a company that can build high pressure lines for your
application.
42 | Injection and Ignition | Diesel System Components

2
Electronic Throttle Body
Features
u Many bore diameters available
u Throttle position sensor is redundant
u For flex-fuel, CNG, LPG
u Idle default position
The throttle body is designed to control the fresh air of
spark ignition engines in combination with an electronic
throttle control system. ETB applications with flex-fuel,
CNG and LPG are permissible if injected in the air flow
after the throttle body.
A typical ETC system includes the following compo-
nents: electronic throttle body, accelerator pedal mod-
ule and electronic control unit.
You will find the available bore diameters in the varia-
tions table.
Application
Max. vibration 50 to 250 m/s
2
at 50 Hz to 2 kHz
Mechanical Data
Available bore diameters 32 mm
40 mm
46 mm
50 mm
52 mm
54 mm
60 mm
68 mm
82 mm
Electrical Data
Supply voltage 6 to 16 V
Supply voltage sensor 5 0.2 V
Max. allowed generator current <10.0 A
Characteristic
Output signal I 0 to 5 V for 0 to 90
Output signal II 5 to 0 V for 0 to 90
Connectors and Wires
Various motorsport and automotive connectors are available on re-
quest.
Please specify the required wire length with your order.
Installation Notes
For correct mounting please respect the hints on the next page
Mounting position.
The ETB can be connected directly to control units with ETC function-
ality.
Please find further application hints in the offer drawing at our home-
page.
Two redundant sensors control the up to date throttle position.
All ETBs have an idle air position.
Electronic Throttle Body 32 mm
Order number 0 280 750 148
Order number 0 280 Y05 107-10
Injection and Ignition | Electronic Throttle Body | 43

2
Dimensions
Mounting position

44 | Injection and Ignition | Electronic Throttle Body

2
Variations
Order number 0 280 750 148 0 280 750 149 F 02U V01 171-01 0 280 Y05 107-10 F 02U V01 184-01

Bore diameter (mm) 32 40 46 50 52
Connector D 261 205 358-01 D 261 205 358-01 D 261 205 356-01 D 261 205 356-01 D 261 205 356-01
Pin 1 A Motor - Motor - Poti 1 Poti 1 Poti 1
Pin 2 B Poti - Poti - Poti - Poti - Poti -
Pin 3 C Poti + Poti + Motor - Motor - Motor -
Pin 4 D Motor + Motor + Poti 2 Poti 2 Poti 2
Pin 5 E Poti 2 Poti 2 Motor + Motor + Motor +
Pin 6 F Poti 1 Poti 1 Poti + Poti + Poti +
Flange diameter
(mm)
40 50 58 58 58
Weight (kg) 0,9 0,9 0,95 0,95 0,95
Max. air flow rate* 394 kg/h at 85 angle 695 kg/h at 85 angle 978 kg/h at 85 angle Not specified Not specified
Opening direction ** counterclockwise counterclockwise clockwise counterclockwise clockwise
Order number 0 280 750 150 0 280 750 151 0 280 750 003 0 280 750 101

Bore diameter (mm) 54 60 68 82
Connector D 261 205 358-01 D 261 205 358-01 D 261 205 356-01 D 261 205 358-01
Pin 1 A Motor - Motor - Poti 1 Motor -
Pin 2 B Poti - Poti - Poti + Poti -
Pin 3 C Poti + Poti + Motor + Poti +
Pin 4 D Motor + Motor + Poti 2 Motor +
Pin 5 E Poti 2 Poti 2 Motor - Poti 2
Pin 6 F Poti 1 Poti 1 Poti - Poti 1
Flange diameter
(mm)
70 68,5 75 90
Weight (kg) 0,95 0,95 1,1 1,1
Max. air flow rate* Not specified Not specified Not specified Not specified
Opening direction ** counterclockwise counterclockwise counterclockwise counterclockwise
* ambient conditions: Air pressure p=1000 mbar, Differential pressure p=600 mbar 25 mbar, rel. humidity rF=40 %, Air
temperature T=24C
** Opening direction is related to view A. See drawings on bottom of chapter Dimensions.
Injection and Ignition | Electronic Throttle Body | 45

2
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini/
Mini M
Features
u 5 to 10 bar
u Methanol version available from 6 to 10 bar
u 30 to 400 l/h reflow
u Adjusted at 105 l/h
u Aluminum housing
Fuel pressure regulators are used to maintain constant
fuel pressure at the injection valves.
We offer this regulator for gasoline as well as for metha-
nol applications.
The main benefit of this regulator includes a higher
pressure range and a higher return flow rate in compari-
son to the production type regulators.
Application
Pressure range See ordering information
Reflow quantity 30 to 400 l/h
Fuel compatibility Mini Gasoline, E85, M22
Fuel compatibility Mini M Gasoline, E85, M100
Operating temperature -40 to 120C
Storage temperature -40 to 100C
Max. vibration <600 m/s at 5 to 250 Hz
Variations
Please see Ordering Information
Mechanical Data
Diameter 37.9 mm
Weight 60 g
Mounting Fastening with a clip
Connector supply Diam. 25 mm, O-ring
Connector reflow Diam. 9.15 mm, O-ring
Installation Notes
Never run the regulator without the integrated filter.
Please oil O-rings lightly with clean and silicone free engine oil before
you install the regulator.
Please make a leak test after you have installed the regulator.
When the pressure regulator is removed and will be reused, the O-
rings must be tested for fractures.
Operation of the pressure regulator with a medium other than gasoline
is not allowed.
Using the FPR Adaptor F 02U V00 735-01 you can rebuild the regula-
tor an inline type.
Standard version 5 bar
Order number B 261 208 105-02
Methanol version 6 bar
Accessories
FPR Adaptor
46 | Injection and Ignition | Fuel Pressure Regulators

2
Dimensions
Injection and Ignition | Fuel Pressure Regulators | 47

2
Installation Recommendation

2
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini A
Features
u 2.2 to 3.5 bar/3.5 to 5 bar
u Pressure adjustable
u Sheet steel housing
This regulator based on a production type regulator was
specially designed for motorsport applications.
The main benefit of this regulator is the adjustability of
the fuel pressure.
Application
Pressure range 2.2 to 3.5 bar
3.5 to 5.0 bar
Reference pressure connector Diam. 5 mm, tube connector
Fuel compatibility Gasoline, E85, M15
Mechanical Data
Diameter 34.9 mm
Weight 58 g
Installation Notes
The tube connector at the housing can be used to supply reference
pressure to the regulator. This can be atmospheric pressure, air box
pressure or manifold pressure.
is not allowed.
2.2 to 3.5 bar
3.5 to 5 bar
Accessories
FPR Adaptor

2
Dimensions

2
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini
38
Features
u 3.8 bar
This production type fuel pressure regulator is designed
for the integration into the full rail.
The main benefits of this regulator include the competi-
tively priced high quality and a high return flow rate.
Application
Pressure range 3.8 bar
Fuel compatibility Gasoline, E10
Mechanical Data
Diameter 34.9 mm
Weight 48 g
Characteristic
Set pressure accuracy 2 % at 105 l/h
Installation Notes
is not allowed.
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini 38
Accessories
FPR Adaptor

2
Dimensions

2

2
Features
u 5 bar
We modified this production type based regulator espe-
cially for motorsport use and increased the pressure lev-
el.
The main benefit of this regulator include the competi-
tively priced high quality and the high return flow rate.
Application
Pressure range 5 bar
Fuel compatibility Gasoline, E85, M15
Mechanical Data
Diameter 34.9 mm
Weight 48.5 g
Characteristic
Set pressure accuracy 2 % at 105 l/h
Installation Notes
is not allowed.
Order number 0 280 B02 722-02
Accessories
FPR Adaptor

2
Dimensions

2

2
FPR Adaptor
Features
u Aluminum housing
u Fits to production type regulators and Motorsport
regulators (FPR Mini, Mini 38, Mini 5, Mini A)
This adaptor offers the opportunity to convert a rail
pressure regulator into an inline pressure regulator. The
adaptor is able to hold a production type regulator as
well as a motorsport regulator. Delivery without regula-
tor.
Application
Fuel compatibility Gasoline, E85/M100
Operating temperature range -40 to 120C
Storage temperature range -40 to 100C
Max. vibration <600 m/s
2
at 5 to 250 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 50 mm
Length 100 mm
Weight 170 g
Mounting Screw fastening with M6 screws
Connector supply 2 x M14 x 1.5
Connector reflow M14 x 1.5
FPR Adaptor

2
Dimensions

2
HP Control Valve DSV
Features
u Working range 10 to 200 bar
u Aluminum housing
The DSV is specially designed for regulation of pressure
in the common rail of high pressure injection systems.
Application
Pressure range 10 to 200 bar
Flow quantity Max. 220 l/h
Max. temperature of location 140C (max. 5 min)
Mechanical Data
Weight 135 g
Size 32 x 54 x 56 mm
Housing Aluminum
Electrical Data
Operating voltage 6.5 to 18 V
Operation current I
max
= 2.2 A
Connector Please see Ordering Information
Connector ASL 1-06-05SB-HE
Without connector

2
Dimensions

2
Fuel Pump FP 100
Features
u >100 l/h
u 725 g
u Max. 5 bar
u Fuel line screwed
The FP 100 is an inline roller cell pump for the installa-
tion outside the fuel tank.
It is capable of providing 100 l/h at 5 bar. Bio-fuel can
be delivered up to E85 (shortens lifetime).
The main benefit of the FP 100 over a production type
pump is the high delivery rate.
Application
Fuel pressure 5 bar
Delivery rate at 5 bar and 22C 118 3 l/h at 14 V
Pressure limiting valve 7 to 12.5 bar rel.
Fuel compatibility E85
Max. vibration 3 mm at 10 to 18 Hz
40 m/s
2
at 18 to 60 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 54 mm
Length 185 mm
Weight 725 g
Mounting Clamping
Electrical Data
Supply voltage 6 to 16.5 V
Operating voltage 13.8 V
Load current at 5 bar and 22C 6.0 0.5 A
Characteristic
Surface coating None
Color Silver
Non-return valve External
Fuel filtering External, on pressure side
Electrical connector +M4/-M5
Electrical matting connector With ring wire M4 and M5
Mechanical connector intake
side
M16x1.5
Mechanical connector pressure
side
M12x1.5
Installation Notes
With E26/E85 or Diesel fuel run-time max. 500 h.
For technical reasons the values may vary.
Please use within the specified limit values only.
page.
Fuel Pump FP 100
Order number Y 580 701 456-03
Injection and Ignition | Fuel Pumps | 61

2
Dimensions
62 | Injection and Ignition | Fuel Pumps

2
Fuel Pump FP 165
Features
u >165 l/h
u 980 g
u Max. 5 bar
u Fuel lines screwed
tion outside the fuel tank.
It is capable of providing 165 l/h at 5 bar. Bio-fuel can
be delivered up to E85 (shortens lifetime!).
The FP 165 is a production type fuel pump, combining
good quality at a low price.
Application
Fuel pressure 5 bar
40 m/s
2
at 18 to 60 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 60 mm
Length 168 mm
Weight 980 g
Mounting Clamping
Electrical Data
Load current at 5 bar and 22C 11.0 2 A
Characteristic
Color Silver
Non-return valve Internal
Electrical matting connector with ring wire M4 and M5
side
M14x1.5
side
M12x1.5
Installation Notes
page.
Fuel Pump FP 165

2
Dimensions

2
Fuel Pump FP 200
Features
u >200 l/h
u 1,030 g
u Max. 5 bar/8 bar
tion outside or inside the fuel tank.
It is capable of providing 200 l/h at 5 bar (8 bar). Bio-
fuel can be delivered up to E85 (shortens lifetime!).
The FP 200 is one of the most popular aftermarket fuel
pumps and has an excellent price.
Application
Fuel pressure 5 bar or 8 bar
40 m/s
2
at 18 to 60 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 60 mm
Length 196 mm
Weight 1,030 g
Mounting Clamping
Electrical Data
Load current at 5 bar and 22C 14 1 A
Load current at 8 bar and 22C 15 1 A
Characteristic
Color Silver
Non-return valve External

2
Electrical matting connector With ring wire M6 and M5
side
M18x1.5
side
M12x1.5
Installation Notes
page.
Fuel Pump FP 200, 5 bar
Fuel Pump FP 200, 8 bar
Dimensions

2
Fuel Pump FP 300
Features
u >300 l/h
u 714 g
u Max. 8 bar
The FP 300 represents the next generation of low-pres-
sure inline fuel pumps. The internals in the pump are de-
signed specifically for motorsport applications.
Higher fuel deliveries from modified rotor design, as
well as an improved power-to-weight ratio are two of
the advantages of this pump.
The pump can be used for gasoline, Diesel and Bio-fuels.
Application
Fuel pressure 8 bar
Pressure limiting valve 8.5 bar rel.
Fuel compatibility Gasoline E85/M100
Diesel
40 m/s
2
at 18 to 60 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 50 mm
Length 174 mm
Weight FP 300 714 g
Mounting Clamping
Electrical Data
Characteristic
Surface coating Anodized
Color Red
Fuel filtering Internal
Mech. connector intake side M18x1.5
Mech. connector pressure side M12x1.5
Installation Notes
Integrated pre-filter allows cleaning of filter by user.
With E26/E85 or M100 fuel run-time max. 500 h.
Please flush the pump with gasoline after use with Methanol fuel.
page.
Fuel Pump FP 300

2
Dimensions

2
Fuel Pump FP 300L
Features
u >300 l/h
u 670 g
u Max. 8 bar
The FP 300L represents the next generation of low-pres-
sure inline fuel pumps. The internals of the pump are
designed specifically for motorsport applications.
Higher fuel delivery from modified rotor design, as well
as an improved power-to-weight ratio are two of the ad-
vantages of this pump.
The pump can be used for gasoline, Diesel and Bio-fuels.
The FP 300L has further weight reduction measures.
Application
Fuel pressure 8 bar
Pressure limiting valve 8.5 bar rel.
Fuel compatibility Gasoline E85/M100
Diesel
40 m/s
2
at 18 to 60 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 50 mm
Length 174 mm
Weight 670 g
Mounting Clamping
Electrical Data
Characteristic
Surface coating Anodized
Color Red
Fuel filtering Internal
Mech. connector intake side M18x1.5
Mech. connector pressure side M12x1.5
Installation Notes
Integrated pre-filter allows cleaning of filter by user.
With E26/E85 or M100 fuel run-time max. 500 h.
Please flush the pump with gasoline after use with methanol fuel.
page.
Fuel Pump FP 300L

2
Dimensions

2
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-FCV/-
FCV HP
Features
u 200 bar or more
u Max. 1.1 cm
3
/rot
cam
u Integrated control valve
u 780 g
The HDP 5 FCV is a compact high pressure single piston
pump. The design allows achieving a big delivery volume
as well as high efficiency, as needed in motorsport ap-
plications. Modifications in the number of cam lobes
and cam lifts allow different flow requirements to be ad-
dressed.
We offer two variations of the HDP 5 FCV: one is equip-
ped with an internal pressure relief valve to limit the
maximum fuel pressure (HDP 5-FCV). This variation does
not require a fuel return line into the fuel tank.
The other variation (HDP 5-FCV HP) is not equipped
with an internal pressure relief valve and therefore re-
quires a pressure regulation valve in the common rail to
avoid overload pressure.
Both variations have an integrated demand control for
metering the amount of fuel supplied into the high pres-
sure fuel system. Both variations can be ordered with a
compact connector or a motorsport connector.
Depending on the requirements of your engine (e.g. fuel
consumption over rotation ratio) we recommend differ-
ent types of tappets, piston springs and cam profiles.
Please notice: Fuel delivery and maximum driveshaft
speed depend on cam profile and type of tappet.
Application
For high pressure manifold injection or gasoline direct injection
Variations
Model Max. pressure Connector
HDP 5-FCV 200 bar Compact
HDP 5-FCV 200 bar Motorsports
HDP 5-FCV HP Over 200 bar Compact
HDP 5-FCV HP Over 200 bar Motorsports
Mechanical Data
Theoretical fuel delivery 0.5 to 1.1 cm/rot
cam
Nominal pressure Please see variations
Weight Approx. 780 g
Max. speed at pump driveshaft Depends on cam profile and type
of tappet
Supply pressure 4 to 7 bar
Compatible fuels Unleaded fuels, E22, E85, M15
Fuel temperature 80C, short term 130C
Max. vibration 600 m/s
2
Electrical connector compact D 261 205 359-01
Electrical connector motorsports F 02U 000 426-01
side
M14x1.5
side
M14x1.5
Installation Notes
Mounting on cylinder head or adapter flag.
Available cam profiles on request.
Please notice: Fuel delivery and maximum driveshaft speed depends
on cam profile and type of tappet.
HDP 5-FCV
Compact connector, max. 200 bar
HDP 5-FCV
Motorsports connector, max. 200 bar
HDP 5-FCV HP
Compact connector, over 200 bar
HDP 5-FCV HP
Motorsports connector, over 200 bar

2
Accessories
Flat tappet (26 mm)
Roller tappet (26 mm)

2
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-FD
Features
u Max. 200 bar
u Max. 1.1 cm
3
/rot
cam
u 780 g
The HDP 5-FD is a compact high pressure single piston
pump. The design allows achieving a big delivery. Varia-
tions in the number of cam lobes and cam lifts allow dif-
ferent flow requirements to be addressed.
This type of high pressure fuel pump is not equipped
with an internal pressure relief valve and therefore rec-
ommends a pressure regulation valve in the common rail
to control the rail pressure and to avoid overload pres-
sure.
Application
Mechanical Data
cam
(typical)
Nominal pressure Max. 200 bar
Weight Approx. 780 g
of tappet
2
side
M14x1.5
side
M14x1.5
Installation Notes
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-FD
Accessories
Flat tappet (26 mm)
Roller tappet (26 mm)

2
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-LW
Features
u Max. 500 bar
u Max. 1.1 cm
3
/rot
cam
u Integrated control valve
u 585 g
u Internal Pressure Relief Valve PRV
The HDP 5-LW is a compact high pressure single piston
pump with a light weight housing. The design allows
achieving a big delivery volume as well as high efficien-
cy, as needed in motorsport applications. Modifications
in the number of cam lobes and cam lifts allow different
flow requirements to be addressed.
The HDP 5-LW is equipped with an internal pressure re-
lief valve to limit the maximum fuel pressure. This pump
does not require a fuel return line into the fuel tank.
The pump has an integrated demand control for meter-
ing the amount of fuel supplied into the high pressure
fuel system. It can be ordered with a compact connector
or a motorsports connector.
Application
Variations
Model PRV Connector
HDP 5-LW 600 bar Compact
HDP 5-LW 600 bar Motorsports
HDP 5-LW Customer specific Compact
HDP 5-LW Customer specific Motorsports
Mechanical Data
cam
Nominal pressure Max. 500 bar
PRV Please see Variations
Weight 585 g without wire
of tappet
2
Electrical connector compact D 261 205 359-01
Electrical connector motorsports F 02U 000 426-01
side
M14x1.5
side
M14x1.5
Installation Notes
HDP 5-LW
Compact connector, max 500 bar, PRV 600 bar
HDP 5-LW
Motorsports connector, max. 500 bar, PRV 600 bar
HDP 5-LW
Compact connector, PRV customer specific
HDP 5-LW
Motorsports connector, PRV customer specific

2
HPI 1.1
Features
u Max. 6 cylinders
u Max. 9,000 rpm (4 cyl. operation)
u 430 g
The injector power stage HPI 1.1 is a device for driving
injectors for gasoline direct injection. Combined with a
suitable ECU up to 6 injectors can be driven. The injec-
tors are gathered in 3 groups of 2 injectors each. Within
a group only one injector can be switched on at the
same time. The 3 groups are totally independent, so
that overlapping injection of injectors of different
groups is possible. Communication between main ECU
and the HPI 1.1 is realized via CAN interface.
Application
Max. number of cylinders 6
Max. rpm (4 cyl. operation) 9,000
Optimized for Bosch high pressure injection valves HDEV 1 and
HDEV 5
sport.com)
Variations
HPI 1.1 Active low HPI 1.1 Active high
Injection con-
trol inputs
Inverting (Low = ON)
for operation with
standard lowside pow-
er stages of automotive
ECUs
Non-inverting (High
= ON)
Mechanical Data
Sheet-metal housing
Housing temperature -25 to 85C
Size 180 x 162 x 46 mm
Weight 430 g
Electrical Data
Power supply 14 V
Operating voltage (normal oper-
ation)
11 to 16 V
Operating voltage (engine start) 6 to 18 V
Nominal voltage 14 V
Mating connector D 261 205 373-01
Communication
1 CAN (500 kBaud)
1 K-Line
HPI 1.1 Active low for HDEV 5
HPI 1.1 Active high for HDEV 5
Injection and Ignition | HP Injection Power Stages | 75

2
HPI 5
Features
u Max. 8 cylinders
u 550 g
The injector power stage HPI 5 is a device for driving in-
jectors and high pressure pumps for gasoline direct in-
jection. Combined with a suitable ECU up to 8 injectors
can be driven. The injectors are gathered in 4 groups of
2 injectors each. Within a group only one injector can be
switched on at the same time. The 4 groups are totally
independent, so that overlapping injection of injectors
of different groups is possible. The HPI 5 is mainly de-
signed to drive the Bosch high pressure pump HDP 5,
but there are also variations for Hitachi HDP available.
Communication between main ECU and the HPI 5 is re-
alized via CAN interface.
Application
Optimized for Bosch high pressure injection valve HDEV 5 and Bosch
high pressure pump HDP 5
Hitachi HDP Gen 1 and Gen 3 variations available
Further HDEV and HDP on request
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
Size (incl. connectors) 190 x 123 x 36 mm
Weight 550 g
Electrical Data
Voltage supply 14 V
Operating voltage 10 to 16 V
Operation voltage (engine start) 6.5 to 16 V
Communication
1 CAN (1 MBaud)
HPI 5
Optimized for Bosch HDP 5
HPI 5
Optimized for Hitachi HDP Gen 1
HPI 5
Optimized for Hitachi HDP Gen 3
76 | Injection and Ignition | HP Injection Power Stages

2
HPI 5-M 4C
Features
u Max. 4 cylinders
u 400 g
The injector power stage HPI 5-M 4C is a device for driv-
ing injectors and high pressure pumps for gasoline di-
rect injection. Combined with a suitable ECU up to $ in-
jectors can be driven. Overlapping injection of injectors
is possible. The HPI 5 is mainly designed to drive the
Bosch high pressure pump HDP 5. Communication be-
tween main ECU and the HPI 5 is realized via CAN inter-
face.
Application
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
Weight 400 g
Electrical Data
Voltage supply 14 V
Mating connector AS 616-26SN
Communication
1 CAN (1 MBaud)
HPI 5-M 4C

2
Dimensions

2
HPI 5-M 8C
Features
u Max. 8 cylinders
u 440 g
The injector power stage HPI 5-M 8C is a device for driv-
ing injectors and high pressure pumps for gasoline di-
rect injection. Combined with a suitable ECU up to 8 in-
jectors can be driven. The injectors are gathered in 4
groups of 2 injectors each. Within a group only one in-
jector can be switched on at the same time. The 4
groups are totally independent, so that overlapping in-
jection of injectors of different groups is possible. The
HPI 5 is mainly designed to drive the Bosch high pres-
sure pump HDP 5. Communication between main ECU
and the HPI 5 is realized via CAN interface.
Application
Mechanical Data
Aluminum housing
Weight 440 g
Electrical Data
Voltage supply 14 V
Mating connector AS 616-26SN
AS 614-19SN
Communication
1 CAN (1 MBaud)
HPI 5-M 8C

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil PS
Features
u Max. 30 kV
u Max. 42 mJ
u Max. 1.5 kV/s
u Max. 10,000 1/min
This pencil coil is a basic low cost concept designed for
cylinder head installation.
The coil PS has no integrated transistor and requires an
ECU with internal ignition power stages.
The coil is only designed for spark plug shaft mounting.
It is a basic concept for ignition applications.
Application
Spark energy 42 mJ
Primary current 7.5 A
Operating temperature range at
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 22 mm
Weight 189 g
Mounting Screw fastening
Electrical Data
Primary resistance with wire 570 m
Secondary resistance Incapable of measurement
High voltage rise time 1.5 kV/s
Max. high voltage at
1 M || 10 pF
30 kV
Spark current 80 mA
Spark duration at 1 kV || 1 M 1.1 ms
Noise suppression Inductive
Suppression diode / EFU Integrated
Characteristic
Measured with power stage IGBT IRG4BC40S (U
ce
=600 V)
respectively BIP372
Connector AMP C-O-28 44 25
Pin 1 ECU ignition power stage
Pin 2 Engine GND
Pin 3 U
batt
Pin 4 N.a.
quest.
Characteristic dwell times [ms]
U
batt
I primary
4.0 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 2.90 4.20 6.30 14.4 - -
8 V 1.83 2.45 3.17 4.10 5.10 6.20
10 V 1.33 1.74 2.18 2.68 3.16 3.49
12 V 1.05 1.35 1.68 2.02 2.33 2.53
14 V 0.86 1.11 1.35 1.62 1.85 1.99
16 V 0.73 0.93 1.14 1.35 1.54 1.65
20 V 0.56 0.71 0.86 1.02 1.15 1.23
22 V 0.50 0.64 0.77 0.91 1.02 1.09
24 V 0.46 0.58 0.70 0.82 0.92 0.98
Measured values are without loom resistance. Loom resistance must
be less than the primary resistance. The needed dwell time is to be
verified through current measurement
Injection and Ignition | Ignition Coils | 81

2
Dwell time
Spark energy and provided high voltage
I prim. Spark energy -duration -currant Hi voltage
4 A 15.0 mJ 0.650 ms 46 mA 15.6 kV
5 A 22.8 mJ 0.793 ms 62 mA 19.3 kV
6 A 30.2 mJ 0.904 ms 73 mA 22.7 kV
7 A 38.2 mJ 1.010 ms 84 mA 26.0 kV
8 A 47.9 mJ 1.101 ms 96 mA 28.8 kV
9 A 52.9 mJ 1.130 ms 100 mA 30.2 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
During mounting of the spark plug please pay attention that full clamp-
ing and proper contacts are made to ensure safe connection between
coil and spark plug.
The coil PS requires an ECU with integrated ignition power stage, e.g.
IGBT IRG4BC40S.
For technical reasons the values of the coils may vary.
Please regard the specified limit values.
page.
In case of ignition-caused malfunctions, please use screened sensor
wires.
Single Fire Coil PS
82 | Injection and Ignition | Ignition Coils

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil PS-T
Features
u Max. 27 kV
u Max. 42 mJ
u Max. 1.5 kV/s
u Max. 10,000 1/min
This pencil coil is a basic low cost concept designed for
cylinder head installation.
The coil PS-T has an integrated transistor and requires
an ECU with internal ignition drivers.
The coil is only designed for spark plug shaft mounting.
It is a basic concept for ignition applications.
Application
Spark energy 42 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 22 mm
Weight 202 g
Electrical Data
Primary resistance with wire Incapable of measurement
1 M || 10 pF
27 kV
Spark current 80 mA
Power stage Integrated
Characteristic
Measured with power stage BIP 355
Connector Bosch Compact
Mating connector
4-pole Compact
D 261 205 336-01
Pin 1 ECU ignition signal
Pin 2 ECU GND
Pin 3 Engine GND
Pin 4 U
batt
quest.
U
batt
I primary
4.0 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 2.90 4.20 6.30 14.4 - -
8 V 1.83 2.45 3.17 4.10 5.10 6.20
10 V 1.33 1.74 2.18 2.68 3.16 3.49
12 V 1.05 1.35 1.68 2.02 2.33 2.53
14 V 0.86 1.11 1.35 1.62 1.85 1.99
16 V 0.73 0.93 1.14 1.35 1.54 1.65
20 V 0.56 0.71 0.86 1.02 1.15 1.23
22 V 0.50 0.64 0.77 0.91 1.02 1.09
24 V 0.46 0.58 0.70 0.82 0.92 0.98

2
Dwell time
I prim. Spark energy -duration -currant Hi voltage
4 A 15.0 mJ 0.650 ms 46 mA 15.6 kV
5 A 22.8 mJ 0.793 ms 62 mA 19.3 kV
6 A 30.2 mJ 0.904 ms 73 mA 22.7 kV
7 A 38.2 mJ 1.010 ms 84 mA 26.0 kV
8 A 47.9 mJ 1.101 ms 96 mA 28.8 kV
9 A 52.9 mJ 1.130 ms 100 mA 30.2 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil PS-T has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition drivers, e.g. MS 4.x or MS 4.x Sport.
page.
wires.
Single Fire Coil PS-T

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil P35
Features
u Max. 34 kV
u Max. 38 mJ
u Max. 2.0 kV/s
u Max. 10,000 1/min
This single fire coil is a low cost concept designed for
direct mounting to the cylinder head.
The coil P35 has no integrated transistor and requires
an ECU with internal ignition power stages.
The coil benefits from series production ensuring ro-
bustness and low cost.
Application
Spark energy 38 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 140.5 mm
Weight 194 to 205 g
Fits to spark plugs with a ceramic diameter of 10 mm
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
34 kV
Spark current 90 mA
Characteristic
Measured with power stage IGBT IRG4BC40S
Connector Sumitomo
Mating connector
3-pole Sumitomo
D 261 205 367-01
Pin 2 Engine GND
Pin 3 U
batt
quest.
Spark plug connector 140.5 mm
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 7.5 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 7.80
8 V 3.90 5.20 6.90 7.90
10 V 2.65 3.36 4.03 4.35 4.70 5.60
12 V 2.04 2.51 2.92 3.10 3.30 3.66
14 V 1.63 2.00 2.30 2.43 2.55 2.79
16 V 1.37 1.67 1.91 2.00 2.10 2.27
18 V 1.19 1.43 1.63 1.70 1.78 1.91
20 V 1.04 1.25 1.42 1.49 1.55 1.66
22 V 0.93 1.11 1.26 1.33 1.37 1.46
24 V 0.84 1.00 1.13 1.18 1.23 1.31

2
Dwell time
I prim. Spark energy -duration -current Hi voltage
5 A 25.6 mJ 0.894 ms 68 mA 26.4 kV
6 A 33.3 mJ 1 ms 78 mA 30.7 kV
7 A 40 mJ 1.07 ms 86 mA 34 kV
7.5 A 42.7 mJ 1.097 ms 89.5 mA 35.7 kV
8 A 44.9 mJ 1.12 ms 93 mA 37 kV
9 A 48.8 mJ 1.15 ms 102 mA 39.6 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil P35 has no integrated transistor and requires an ECU with in-
ternal ignition power stages.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil P35-T
Features
u Max. 34 kV
u Max. 38 mJ
u Max. 2.0 kV/s
u Max. 8,000 1/min
direct mounting to the cylinder head.
The coil P35-T has an integrated transistor and requires
an ECU with internal ignition drivers with 10 mA to 20
mA current output.
bustness and low cost.
Application
Spark energy 38 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 140.5 mm
Weight 194 to 205 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
34 kV
Spark current 90 mA
Characteristic
Connector Sumitomo
Mating connector
3-pole Sumitomo
D 261 205 367-01
Pin 2 ECU

GND
Pin 3 U
batt
quest.
Spark plug connector 140.5 mm
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 7.5 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 11.40
8 V 4.40 6.00 8.0 10.0
10 V 2.90 3.70 4.0 4.5 5.0 6.0
12 V 2.14 2.68 3.2 3.0 3.1 3.4
14 V 1.73 2.11 2.3 2.5 2.9 2.5
16 V 1.44 1.75 1.9 2.9 2.0 2.8
18 V 1.24 1.50 1.9 1.8 1.5 2.0
20 V 1.09 1.30 1.7 1.3 1.0 1.2
22 V 0.97 1.6 1.0 1.7 1.2 1.1
24 V 0.87 1.4 1.7 1.2 1.7 1.5

2
Dwell time
5 A 25.4 mJ 0.91 ms 62 mA 26.5 kV
6 A 33.4 mJ 1 ms 74 mA 30.3 kV
7 A 38.8 mJ 1.07 ms 83 mA 33 kV
7.5 A 41 mJ 1.093 ms 87 mA 33.8 kV
8 A 43.3 mJ 1.11 ms 91 mA 34.5 kV
9 A 47 mJ 1.15 ms 100 mA 36.2 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil P35-T has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition drivers with 10 to 20 mA current output.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil P35-E8
Features
u Max. 34 kV
u Max. 38 mJ
u Max. 2.0 kV/s
u Connector length on customer requirement
u Max. 10,000 1/min
For this single fire coil the customer can define the
length of the spark plug connector.
This coil has no integrated transistor and requires an
The coil is for spark plugs with ceramic diameter of
d=8 mm.
bustness.
Application
Spark energy 38 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 85 to 225 mm
Weight 194 to 250 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
34 kV
Spark current 90 mA
Characteristic
Connector Sumitomo
Mating connector
3-pole Sumitomo
D 261 205 367-01
Pin 2 Engine GND
Pin 3 U
batt
U
batt
I primary
4.0 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 5.9 11.4
8 V 3.1 4.4 6.0 8.6
10 V 2.2 2.9 3.7 4.4 5.2 6.6
12 V 1.6 2.1 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9
14 V 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0
16 V 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
18 V 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.0
20 V 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.7
22 V 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
24 V 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4

2
Dwell time
4 A 18 mJ 0.77 ms 50 mA 22 kV
5 A 25.4 mJ 0.91 ms 62 mA 26.5 kV
6 A 33.4 mJ 1 ms 74 mA 30.3 kV
7 A 38.8 mJ 1.07 ms 83 mA 33 kV
8 A 43.3 mJ 1.11 ms 91 mA 34.5 kV
9 A 47 mJ 1.15 ms 100 mA 36.2 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
Please pay attention to your spark plug, if it has a ceramic diameter of
8 or 10 mm.
The coil P35-E has no integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition power stages.
page.
wires.
Please specify the required wire and spark plug connec-
tor length with your order.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 34 kV
u Max. 38 mJ
u Max. 2.0 kV/s
u Max. 10,000 1/min
d=10 mm.
The single fire coil benefits from series production en-
suring robustness.
Application
Spark energy 38 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 110 to 225 mm
Weight 194 to 250 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
34 kV
Spark current 90 mA
Characteristic
Connector Sumitomo
Mating connector
3-pole Sumitomo
D 261 205 367-01
Pin 2 Engine GND
Pin 3 U
batt
U
batt
I primary
4.0 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 5.9 11.4
8 V 3.1 4.4 6.0 8.6
10 V 2.2 2.9 3.7 4.4 5.2 6.6
12 V 1.6 2.1 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9
14 V 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0
16 V 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
18 V 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.0
20 V 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.7
22 V 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
24 V 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4
4 A 18 mJ 0.77 ms 50 mA 22 kV
5 A 25.4 mJ 0.91 ms 62 mA 26.5 kV
6 A 33.4 mJ 1 ms 74 mA 30.3 kV
7 A 38.8 mJ 1.07 ms 83 mA 33 kV

2
8 A 43.3 mJ 1.11 ms 91 mA 34.5 kV
9 A 47 mJ 1.15 ms 100 mA 36.2 kV
Installation Notes
8 or 10 mm.
The coil P35-E has no integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition power stages.
page.
wires.
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil P35-TE8
Features
u Max. 34 kV
u Max. 38 mJ
u Max. 2.0 kV/s
u Max. 8,000 1/min
The coil P35-TE has an integrated transistor and re-
quires an ECU with internal ignition drivers with 10 mA
to 20 mA current output.
This coil is for spark plugs with ceramic diameter of
d=8 mm.
bustness.
Application
Spark energy 38 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 85 to 225 mm
Weight 194 to 250 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
34 kV
Spark current 90 mA
Characteristic
Measured with internal power
stage
BIP 373
Connector Sumitomo
Mating connector
3-pole Sumitomo
D 261 205 367-01
Pin 2 ECU GND
Pin 3 U
batt
quest.
U
batt
I primary
4.0 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 5.9 11.4
8 V 3.1 4.4 6.0 8.6
10 V 2.2 2.9 3.7 4.4 5.2 6.6
12 V 1.6 2.1 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9
14 V 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0
16 V 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
18 V 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.0
20 V 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.7
22 V 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
24 V 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4

2
Dwell time
4 A 18 mJ 0.77 ms 50 mA 22 kV
5 A 25.4 mJ 0.91 ms 62 mA 26.5 kV
6 A 33.4 mJ 1 ms 74 mA 30.3 kV
7 A 38.8 mJ 1.07 ms 83 mA 33 kV
8 A 43.3 mJ 1.11 ms 91 mA 34.5 kV
9 A 47 mJ 1.15 ms 100 mA 36.2 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
8 or 10 mm.
The coil P35-TE has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition drivers with 10 mA to 20 mA current output.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 34 kV
u Max. 38 mJ
u Max. 2.0 kV/s
u Max. 8,000 1/min
The coil P35-TE has an integrated transistor and re-
This coil is for spark plugs with ceramic diameter of
d=10 mm.
bustness.
Application
Spark energy 38 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 110 to 225 mm
Weight 194 to 250 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
34 kV
Spark current 90 mA
Characteristic
stage
BIP 373
Connector Sumitomo
Mating connector
3-pole Sumitomo
D 261 205 367-01
Pin 2 ECU GND
Pin 3 U
batt
quest.
U
batt
I primary
4.0 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A
6 V 5.9 11.4
8 V 3.1 4.4 6.0 8.6
10 V 2.2 2.9 3.7 4.4 5.2 6.6
12 V 1.6 2.1 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9
14 V 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0
16 V 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
18 V 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.0
20 V 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.7
22 V 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
24 V 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4

2
Dwell time
4 A 18 mJ 0.77 ms 50 mA 22 kV
5 A 25.4 mJ 0.91 ms 62 mA 26.5 kV
6 A 33.4 mJ 1 ms 74 mA 30.3 kV
7 A 38.8 mJ 1.07 ms 83 mA 33 kV
8 A 43.3 mJ 1.11 ms 91 mA 34.5 kV
9 A 47 mJ 1.15 ms 100 mA 36.2 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
8 or 10 mm.
The coil P35-TE has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition drivers with 10 mA to 20 mA current output.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil P50/P50-M
Features
u Max. 35 kV
u Max. 50 mJ
u Max. 3.0 kV/s
u High voltage contacting via high voltage wire and
spark plug connector possible
u Max. 10,000 1/min
The single fire coil P50 is a low cost concept designed
for direct mounting to the cylinder head. A high voltage
ignition wire can optionally be connected to the secon-
dary output terminal.
The coil P50 requires an ECU with internal ignition pow-
er stages for each single fire coil.
The coil P50-M is specifically for motorsport applica-
tions. This coil is operable in higher vibration environ-
ments.
Application
Spark energy 50 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
Max. vibration Please see Variations
Variations
P50 P50-M
2
at
5 to 2,000 Hz
800 m/s
2
at
5 to 2,000 Hz
Weight 223 g 265 g
Spark plug connector - +
Mechanical Data
Weight Please see Variations
Mounting Pluggable
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
35 kV
Spark current 92 mA
Noise suppression With spark plug connector
Characteristic
ce
=600 V)
Mating connector
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 335-01
Pin 2 Engine GND
Pin 3 U
batt
quest.
For spark plugs Ceramic diameter d=10 mm
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A 10 A
6 V 3.84 4.93 6.2 7.7 9.5 11.2
8 V 2.54 3.14 3.81 4.51 5.17 5.61
10 V 1.9 2.33 2.76 3.21 3.62 3.87
12 V 1.51 1.84 2.17 2.51 2.8 2.97
14 V 1.26 1.52 1.79 2.06 2.29 2.42
16 V 1.07 1.3 1.53 1.74 1.93 2.04
18 V 0.94 1.13 1.32 1.51 1.67 1.77
24 V 0.68 0.81 0.95 1.08 1.19 1.26
30 V 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.84 0.93 0.98

2
Dwell time
5 A 22 mJ 0.82 ms 60 mA 26.8 kV
6 A 29.7 mJ 0.93 ms 68.5 mA 31.6 kV
7 A 37.5 mJ 1.03 ms 77 mA 36.4 kV
8 A 46.3 mJ 1.12 ms 87.5 mA 40.9 kV
9 A 53 mJ 1.17 ms 97 mA 44.4 kV
10 A 58.4 mJ 1.21 ms 105 mA 46.3 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
ternal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT IRG4BC40S or BIP.
page.
wires.
Coil P50
Coil P50-M
Motorsport version
Accessories
Accessory spark plug connector

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 35 kV
u Max. 65 mJ
u Developed for GDI engines
u Max. 10,000 1/min
direct mounting to the cylinder-head.
The coil P65 has no integrated transistor and requires
an ECU with internal ignition power stages.
Application
Spark energy 65 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 180 mm
Weight w/o wire < 222 g
Electrical Data
Primary resistance 570 m
1 M || 10 pF
35 kV
Spark current 74 mA
Noise suppression Inductive and 1 k resistance
Characteristic
ce
=600 V)
Connector Tyco AMP
Pin 1 Engine GND
Pin 2 U
batt
Dwell time
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 7.5 A 8.0 A 8.5 A
6 V 8.74 18.5
8 V 4.5 6.4 9 10.8 13.9
10 V 3.1 4.2 5.4 6 6.6 7.2
12 V 2.36 3.1 3.88 4.25 4.63 4.92
14 V 1.9 2.48 3.05 3.32 3.57 3.77
16 V 1.61 2.06 2.53 2.73 2.93 3.08
18 V 1.55 2 2.43 2.62 2.81 2.95
20 V 1.39 1.77 2.16 2.33 2.48 2.6
22 V 1.22 1.54 1.88 2.02 2.15 2.26
24 V 0.97 1.23 1.49 1.6 1.71 1.78

2
Spark energy
5 A 37.8 mJ 1.46 ms 49 mA 24.3 kV
6 A 54.5 mJ 1,74 ms 59 mA 28.9 kV
7 A 69.8 mJ 1.97 ms 69 mA 33.2 kV
7.5 A 77.6 mJ 2.04 ms 74 mA 35.8 kV
8 A 83.0 mJ 2.11 ms 77 mA 37.7 kV
8.5 A 88.0 mJ 2.16 ms 81 mA 39.0 kV
Installation Notes
ternal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT IRG4BC40S or BIP.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 33 kV
u Max. 65 mJ
u Max. 10,000 1/min (with reduced dwell time)
direct mounting on the cylinder head.
The coil P65-T has an integrated transistor and requires
an ECU with internal ignition drivers.
Application
Spark energy 65 mJ
outer core
-40 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 143 mm
Weight 222 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
33 kV
Spark current 70 mA
Integrated suppression diode /
EFU

Integrated power stage
Characteristic
Connector Tyco 0-1488991-1
Mating connector F 02U B00 555-01
Pin 2 ECU GND
Pin 3 U
batt
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 5.5 A 6.0 A 6.5 A 7.0 A 7.5 A
Max.
1000
/min
10 9 8 7 6 5
6 V 10.7 11.6
8 V 4.7 5.4 6.8 8.3 10.2
10 V 3.1 3.55 4.25 4.87 5.6 6.3
12 V 2.32 2.66 3.12 3.51 3.94 4.36
14 V 1.86 2.1 2.45 2.75 3.07 3.36
16 V 1.55 1.77 2.03 2.26 2.51 2.73
16.5 V 1.49 1.7 1.95 2.17 2.40 2.61
18 V 1.34 1.51 1.73 1.92 2.13 2.31
20 V 1.16 1.33 1.51 1.67 1.85 2.0
24 V 0.93 1.05 1.19 1.32 1.45 1.57
Dwell time

2
5 A 33.7 mJ 1.37 ms 50 mA 24.4 kV
5.5 A 42 mJ 1.54 ms 54 mA 27.0 kV
6 A 48.9 mJ 1.62 ms 59 mA 29.1 kV
6.5 A 55.9 mJ 1.74 ms 63 mA 31.2 kV
7 A 63.6 mJ 1.85 ms 68 mA 33.2V
7.5 A 71.9 mJ 1.92 ms 73 mA 34.7 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil P65-T has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition drivers with 10 to 20 mA current output.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 35 kV
u Max. 65 mJ
u Max. 10,000 1/min
The coil is for spark plugs with ceramic diameter
d=8 mm.
bustness.
Application
Spark energy 65 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 180 mm
Electrical Data
Max. high voltage at 1 M || 10
pF
35 kV
Spark current 74 mA
Characteristic
ce
=600 V)
Connector Tyco AMP
Pin 1 Engine GND
Pin 2 U
batt
Dwell time
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 7.5 A 8.0 A 8.5 A
6 V 8.74 18.5
8 V 4.5 6.4 9 10.8 13.9
10 V 3.1 4.2 5.4 6 6.6 7.2
12 V 2.36 3.1 3.88 4.25 4.63 4.92
14 V 1.9 2.48 3.05 3.32 3.57 3.77
16 V 1.61 2.06 2.53 2.73 2.93 3.08
18 V 1.55 2 2.43 2.62 2.81 2.95
20 V 1.39 1.77 2.16 2.33 2.48 2.6

2
22 V 1.22 1.54 1.88 2.02 2.15 2.26
24 V 0.97 1.23 1.49 1.6 1.71 1.78
Spark energy
5 A 37.8 mJ 1.46 ms 49 mA 24.3 kV
6 A 54.5 mJ 1,74 ms 59 mA 28.9 kV
7 A 69.8 mJ 1.97 ms 69 mA 33.2 kV
7.5 A 77.6 mJ 2.04 ms 74 mA 35.8 kV
8 A 83.0 mJ 2.11 ms 77 mA 37.7 kV
8.5 A 88.0 mJ 2.16 ms 81 mA 39.0 kV
Installation Notes
The coil P65-E8 has no integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT IRG4BC40S or BIP.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 35 kV
u Max. 65 mJ
u Max. 10,000 1/min
The coil is for spark plugs with ceramic diameter
d=10 mm.
bustness.
Application
Spark energy 65 mJ
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 180 mm
Electrical Data
pF
35 kV
Spark current 74 mA
Characteristic
ce
=600 V)
Connector Tyco AMP
Pin 1 Engine GND
Pin 2 U
batt
Dwell time
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 7.5 A 8.0 A 8.5 A
6 V 8.74 18.5
8 V 4.5 6.4 9 10.8 13.9
10 V 3.1 4.2 5.4 6 6.6 7.2
12 V 2.36 3.1 3.88 4.25 4.63 4.92
14 V 1.9 2.48 3.05 3.32 3.57 3.77
16 V 1.61 2.06 2.53 2.73 2.93 3.08
18 V 1.55 2 2.43 2.62 2.81 2.95
20 V 1.39 1.77 2.16 2.33 2.48 2.6

2
22 V 1.22 1.54 1.88 2.02 2.15 2.26
24 V 0.97 1.23 1.49 1.6 1.71 1.78
Spark energy
5 A 37.8 mJ 1.46 ms 49 mA 24.3 kV
6 A 54.5 mJ 1,74 ms 59 mA 28.9 kV
7 A 69.8 mJ 1.97 ms 69 mA 33.2 kV
7.5 A 77.6 mJ 2.04 ms 74 mA 35.8 kV
8 A 83.0 mJ 2.11 ms 77 mA 37.7 kV
8.5 A 88.0 mJ 2.16 ms 81 mA 39.0 kV
Installation Notes
The coil P65-E10 has no integrated transistor and requires an ECU
with internal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT IRG4BC40S or BIP.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 33 kV
u Max. 65 mJ
The coil P65-TE8 has an integrated transistor and re-
8 mm.
bustness.
Application
Spark energy 65 mJ
outer core
-40 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 143 mm
Weight 222 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
33 kV
Spark current 70 mA
EFU

Characteristic
stage
BIP 385
Pin 2 ECU GND
Pin 3 U
batt
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 5.5 A 6.0 A 6.5 A 7.0 A 7.5 A
Max.
1000
/min
10 9 8 7 6 5
6 V 10.7 11.6
8 V 4.7 5.4 6.8 8.3 10.2
10 V 3.1 3.55 4.25 4.87 5.6 6.3
12 V 2.32 2.66 3.12 3.51 3.94 4.36
14 V 1.86 2.1 2.45 2.75 3.07 3.36
16 V 1.55 1.77 2.03 2.26 2.51 2.73
16.5 V 1.49 1.7 1.95 2.17 2.40 2.61
18 V 1.34 1.51 1.73 1.92 2.13 2.31
20 V 1.16 1.33 1.51 1.67 1.85 2.0
24 V 0.93 1.05 1.19 1.32 1.45 1.57

2
Dwell time
5 A 33.7 mJ 1.37 ms 50 mA 24.4 kV
5.5 A 42 mJ 1.54 ms 54 mA 27.0 kV
6 A 48.9 mJ 1.62 ms 59 mA 29.1 kV
6.5 A 55.9 mJ 1.74 ms 63 mA 31.2 kV
7 A 63.6 mJ 1.85 ms 68 mA 33.2V
7.5 A 71.9 mJ 1.92 ms 73 mA 34.7 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil P65-TE8 has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU
with internal ignition drivers.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 33 kV
u Max. 65 mJ
The P65-TE10 has an integrated transistor and requires
an ECU with internal ignition drivers with 10 mA to 20
mA current output.
10 mm.
bustness.
Application
Spark energy 65 mJ
outer core
-40 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 143 mm
Weight 222 g
Electrical Data
pF
33 kV
Spark current 70 mA
EFU

Characteristic
stage
BIP 385
Pin 2 ECU GND
Pin 3 U
batt
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 5.5 A 6.0 A 6.5 A 7.0 A 7.5 A
Max.
1000
/min
10 9 8 7 6 5
6 V 10.7 11.6
8 V 4.7 5.4 6.8 8.3 10.2
10 V 3.1 3.55 4.25 4.87 5.6 6.3
12 V 2.32 2.66 3.12 3.51 3.94 4.36
14 V 1.86 2.1 2.45 2.75 3.07 3.36
16 V 1.55 1.77 2.03 2.26 2.51 2.73
16.5 V 1.49 1.7 1.95 2.17 2.40 2.61
18 V 1.34 1.51 1.73 1.92 2.13 2.31
20 V 1.16 1.33 1.51 1.67 1.85 2.0
24 V 0.93 1.05 1.19 1.32 1.45 1.57

2
Dwell time
5 A 33.7 mJ 1.37 ms 50 mA 24.4 kV
5.5 A 42 mJ 1.54 ms 54 mA 27.0 kV
6 A 48.9 mJ 1.62 ms 59 mA 29.1 kV
6.5 A 55.9 mJ 1.74 ms 63 mA 31.2 kV
7 A 63.6 mJ 1.85 ms 68 mA 33.2V
7.5 A 71.9 mJ 1.92 ms 73 mA 34.7 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil P65-TE10 has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU
with internal ignition drivers.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Twin Single Fire Coil 2x1
Features
u Max. 35 kV
u 2 x 50 mJ
u Max. 2.1 kV/s
u Developed for twin spark engines
u 2 independent coils in 1 housing
This ignition coil is specifically developed for engines
with twin sparks.
The advantage of this coil is that are two separated coils
in one housing. So the ignition can be parallel or serial-
offset with some angular degrees.
The Twin Single Fire Coil requires an ECU with separa-
ted ignition power stages for every coil (2 per Twin Sin-
gle Fire Coil 2x1).
This coil is a series coil, produced in great quantities.
The advantages of coils from run production are low
costs and high robustness.
Application
Spark energy 2 x 50 mJ
Primary current 2 x 7.5 A
Operating temperature range
outer core
-20 to 140C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Weight 496 g
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
35 kV
Spark current 95 mA
Suppression diode / EFU
Characteristic
ce
=600 V)
Mating connector
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 335-01
Pin 1 Coil 2 (b) ECU Ignition Power
Stage
Pin 2 U
batt
Pin 3 Coil 1 (a) ECU Ignition Power
Stage
quest.
U
batt
I primary
4.0 A 5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 7.5 A 8.0 A
6 V 4.6 6.5 9.2 13.6
8 V 2.9 3.9 4.8 5.7 6.1 6.5
10 V 2.1 2.74 3.36 3.9 4.0 4.2
12 V 1.65 2.11 2.55 2.92 3.04 3.18
14 V 1.36 1.74 2.07 2.35 2.45 2.55
16 V 1.16 1.47 1.75 1.98 2.05 2.14
18 V 1.02 1.28 1.51 1.7 1.77 1.84

2
Dwell time
4 A 20 mJ 0.784 ms 55 mA 22.5 kV
5 A 29.9 mJ 0.931 ms 70 mA 27.5 kV
6 A 38 mJ 1.04 ms 85 mA 31.5 kV
7 A 46.2 mJ 1.11 ms 90 mA 35.4 kV
7.5 A 49.5 mJ 1.14 ms 95 mA 36.7 kV
8 A 52.4 mJ 1.16 ms 105 mA 37.7 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil can be mounted directly on the engine.
Ignition wires are needed to connect the coil with the spark plug.
The Twin Single Fire Coil 2x1 has no integrated transistors and re-
quires an ECU with internal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT or BIP.
page.
wires.
Twin Single Fire Coil 2x1

2
Dimensions

2
Double Fire Coil 2x2
Features
u Max. 35 kV
u Max. 70 mJ
u Max. 1.9 kV/s
u For 4 cyl. engines
This dual spark ignition coil is designed for low-cost ap-
plications in 4-cylinder engines.
The Double Fire Coil 2x2 has no integrated transistor
and requires an ECU with internal ignition power stages.
The advantage of this coil is that the ECU needs only
two internal ignition power stages for supplying a 4-cyl-
inder engine.
The Double Fire Coil 2x2 benefits from series produc-
tion ensuring robustness and low cost.
Application
Spark energy 70 mJ
outer core
-20 to 120C
2
at 5 to 250 Hz
Mechanical Data
Weight 916 g
Electrical Data
Secondary resistance 13.3 k
1 M || 10 pF
35 kV
Spark current 70 mA
Characteristic
Measured with power stage IGBT IRG4BC40S (Uce=600 V)
Connector Bosch Jetronic
Mating connector
3-pole Jetronic
D 261 205 289-01
Pin 1 Coil 2 ECU Ignition Power Stage
Pin 2 U
batt
quest.
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A 10 A
6 V 6.9 9.3 13.1 22.2
8 V 4.2 5.3 6.7 8.1 9.8 12.0
10 V 3.0 3.8 4.6 5.4 6.2 7.0
12 V 2.4 2.9 3.5 4.1 4.6 5.1
14 V 1.9 2.4 2.8 3.3 3.6 4.0
16 V 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.3
20 V 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5
22 V 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2
24 V 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
Dwell time

2
5 A 34.5 mJ 1.6 ms 40 mA 24.9 kV
6 A 46.5 mJ 1.83 ms 51 mA 30 kV
7 A 58.0 mJ 2.03 ms 61 mA 34.5 kV
8 A 69.6 mJ 2.2 ms 70 mA 38.6 kV
9 A 79.9 mJ 2.31 ms 77 mA 42.2 kV
10 A 89.9 mJ 2.4 ms 88 mA 45 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
Ignition wires are needed to connect the coil with the spark plug,
please pay attention that the spark plugs are connected in the correct
ignition firing order. Numbers in the offer drawing or on the ignition
coil are not the firing order but the cylinders order.
The Double Fire Coil 2x2 has no integrated transistor and requires an
ECU with two internal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT or BIP.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 35 kV
u Max. 65 mJ
u Max. 1.9 kV/s
u For 6 cyl. engines
This dual spark ignition coil is designed for low-cost ap-
plications in 6-cylinder engines.
The Double Fire Coil 3x2 has no integrated transistor
and requires an ECU with internal ignition power stages.
The advantage of this coil is that the ECU needs only
three internal ignition power stages for supplying a 6-
cylinder engine.
The Double Fire Coil 3x2 benefits from series produc-
tion ensuring robustness and low cost.
Application
Spark energy 65 mJ
outer core
-20 to 120C
2
at 5 to 250 Hz
Mechanical Data
Weight 1,490 g
Electrical Data
Secondary resistance 12 k
1 M || 10 pF
35 kV
Spark current 80 mA
Characteristic
ce
= 600 V)
Mating connector
3-pole Jetronic
D 261 205 351-01
Pin 4 U
batt
quest.
U
batt
I primary
5.0 A 6.0 A 7.0 A 8.0 A 9.0 A 10 A
6 V 7.2 9.5 13.5
8 V 4.3 5.4 6.6 7.9 9.5
10 V 3.1 3.8 4.5 5.2 6.0 6.7
12 V 2.4 2.9 3.5 3.9 4.4 4.9
14 V 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2 3.5 3.9
16 V 1.7 2.0 2.4 2.7 2.9 3.2
18 V 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.7
20 V 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4
22 V 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 1.9 2.1
24 V 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 1.9
Dwell time

2
5 A 34.4 mJ 1.44 ms 48 mA 25.4 kV
6 A 45 mJ 1.63 ms 60 mA 29.9 kV
7 A 56.5 mJ 1.78 ms 70 mA 34 kV
8 A 67.6 mJ 1.9 ms 80 mA 39.3 kV
9 A 77.7 mJ 1.98 ms 88.8 mA 43 kV
10 A 86.2 mJ 2.07 ms 100 mA 45 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
Ignition wires are needed to connect the coil with the spark plug,
please pay attention that the spark plugs are connected in the correct
ignition firing order. Numbers in the offer drawing or on the ignition
coil are not the firing order but the cylinders order.
The Double Fire Coil 3x2 has no integrated transistor and requires an
ECU with three internal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT or BIP.
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil S19
Features
u Max. 30 kV
u Max. 34 mJ
u Max. 7.5 kV/s
u Max. 20,000 1/min
This single fire coil was developed for the use in Formu-
la 1 high performance engines. It is designed to mount
directly on the spark plug.
This coil optionally provides an ionic current measure-
ment.
The coil has no integrated transistor and requires an
The main benefits of this high performance coil are its
robustness in hard racing applications and high efficien-
cy.
Application
Spark energy 34 mJ
Primary current 25 A
outer core
0 to 160C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Diameter 18.5 mm
Weight 100 g
Mounting Pluggable / pressed
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
30 kV
Spark current 320 mA
Ionic current signal Optional
Characteristic
ce
= 600 V)
Connector Open end
Mating connector -
Pin 1 U
batt
red
Pin 2 ECU power stage white (blue
with optional ionic current meas-
urement)
Pin 3 Engine GND black
Pin 4 Optional ionic current signal
screen wire white
quest.
Wire size AWG 20/22
Wire length L Max. 100 cm
U
batt
I primary
12 A 16.0 A 20.0 A 22.0 A 25.0 A
6 V 0.7 1.4
8 V 0.390 0.613 0.980 1.300
10 V 0.278 0.411 0.586 0.695 0.910
12 V 0.216 0.310 0.426 0.491 0.606
14 V 0.176 0.250 0.335 0.382 0.460
16 V 0.148 0.208 0.276 0.313 0.371
24 V 0.084 0.119 0.157 0.175 0.208
27 V 0.077 0.107 0.139 0.155 0.180
30 V 0.068 0.094 0.122 0.136 0.157

2
Dwell time
12 A 9 mJ 120 s 150 mA 17.5 kV
16 A 15.2 mJ 154 s 200 mA 22.8 kV
20 A 22.8 mJ 186 s 250 mA 27.8 kV
22 A 27.2 mJ 200 s 275 mA 30 kV
25 A 34.2 mJ 221 s 320 mA 33.4 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil S19 has no integrated transistor and requires an ECU with in-
ternal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT IRG4BC40S.
Please find further application hints at our homepage.
wires.
Single Fire Coil S19

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil S22/S22-T
Features
u Max. 25 kV
u Max. 60 mJ
u Max. 5.0 kV/s
u Max. 10,000 1/min (higher with reduced dwell
time)
This single fire coil was developed for the use in high
performance engines. It is designed to mount directly on
the spark plug and
This coil optionally provides an ionic current measure-
ment. The coil S22 has no integrated transistor and re-
quires an ECU with internal ignition power stages. The
coil S22-T has an integrated transistor and requires an
ECU with internal ignition drivers.
robustness in hard racing applications and high energy
efficiency.
Application
Spark energy 60 mJ
outer core
Please see Variations
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Variations
S22 S22-T
Primary resistance with wire 330 m Incapable of
measurement
Integrated power stage - +
Pin 1 U
batt
red U
batt
red
Pin 2 ECU ignition
power stage
white
ECU ignition
signal yellow
Pin 3 Engine GND
black
ECU GND
blue
Pin 4 Ion current
signal screen
wire white
Engine GND
black
Pin 5 N.a. Optional ion
current signal
screen wire
white
Measured with power stage IGBT
IRG4BC40S
(U
ce
= 600 V)
IGBT
IRF5036S
(U
ce
= 400 V)
outer core
0 to 160C 0 to 150C
Mechanical Data
Diameter 22 mm
Weight 150 g
Mounting Pluggable / pressed
Electrical Data
Primary resistance with wire Please see Variations
1 M || 10 pF
25 kV
Integrated power stage Please see Variations
Ionic current signal Optional
Characteristic
Measured with power stage Please see Variations
Connector Open end
Mating connector -
Pin 1 U
batt
red
Pin 2 Please see Variations
quest.

2
Wire size AWG 20/22
U
batt
I primary
8 A 10 A 12 A 14 A 15 A 16 A
6 V 1.76 2.61 4.61
8 V 1.10 1.49 1.99 2.70 3.12 3.74
10 V 0.80 1.08 1.37 1.71 1.91 2.12
12 V 0.62 0.83 1.04 1.27 1.40 1.52
14 V 0.51 0.68 0.84 1.01 1.10 1.19
16 V 0.44 0.53 0.70 0.84 0.91 0.99
20 V 0.34 0.44 0.53 0.63 0.68 0.73
24 V 0.27 0.35 0.43 0.50 0.54 0.58
Dwell time
8 A 18.1 mJ 251 s 150 mA 21.1 kV
10 A 28.3 mJ 305 s 185 mA 22.7 kV
12 A 39 mJ 353 s 225 mA 23.6 kV
14 A 50.8 mJ 394 s 260 mA 24.6 kV
15 A 58 mJ 415 s 280 mA 24.9 kV
16 A 64 mJ 430 s 300 mA 25.2 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
The coil S22 has no integrated transistor and requires an ECU with in-
ternal ignition power stages, e.g. IGBT IRG4BC40S.
The coil S22-T has an integrated transistor and requires an ECU with
internal ignition drivers.
Operation with limit values of 16 A can reduce the life time of the igni-
tion coil. In case of permanent operation please use 12 A. This will
bring spark energy of 40 mJ.
wires.
Coil S22
Coil S22-T
Integrated transistor

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil C90i-pro
Features
u Max. 40 kV
u Max. 90 mJ
u Max. 5.0 kV/s
u Especially developed for Turbo-GDI engines
u Max. 15,000 1/min
This single fire coil was developed for the use e.g. in
GDI (turbocharged) high performance engines. It is de-
signed for direct cylinder head mounting. The C90i-pro
provides the possibility of ionic current measurement.
high energy capability and a very good provided high
voltage.
Application
Spark energy 90 mJ
outer core
0 to 160C
2
at 50 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 168 mm
Mounting screw fastening
Electrical Data
pF
40 kV
Suppression diode / EFU Internal
Ionic current measurement +
Characteristic
Connector On request
Mating connector On request
Pin 1 U
batt
red
Pin 2 ECU ignition power stage blue
Pin 4 Ionic current signal white
Wire length 100 cm
Wire size AWG 20/22
For spark plugs Ceramic diameter d = 10 mm
quest.
Please specify the required wire length and the length of the spark
plug connector with your order
U
batt
I primary
10.0 A 12.0
A
15.0
A
16.0
a
17.0
A
20.0
A
6 V 3.2 4.5 7.6 9.8
8 V 1.88 2.49 3.47 3.79 4.10
10 V 1.35 1.76 2.34 2.51 2.67 3.05
12 V 1.06 1.35 1.77 1.89 2.00 2.24
14 V 0.87 1.11 1.43 1.52 1.60 1.79
16 V 0.74 0.93 1.20 1.28 1.34 1.49
16.5
V
0.71 0.90 1.15 1.23 1.29 1.43
18 V 0.64 0.81 1.03 1.10 1.15 1.27

2
Dwell time
10 A 41.4 mJ 0.74 ms 100 mA 31.6 kV
12 A 59.5 mJ 0.882 ms 122 mA 37.4 kV
15 A 84.4 mJ 1.034 ms 148 mA 45.7 kV
16 A 92.6 mJ 1.07 ms 158 mA 46 kV
17 A 100 mJ 1.09 ms 165 mA 46 kV
20 A 115 mJ 1.16 ms 190 mA 46 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
This coil is only for use with engine control units having an integrated
ignition power stage, e.g. IGBT IRG4BC40S or BIP.
Please regard the specified limit values (see Electrical Data).
Usage above Iprim = 16 A may reduce the lifetime.
page.
Single Fire Coil C90i-pro

2
Dimensions

2
Single Fire Coil C90i-E8
Features
u Max. 40 kV
u Max. 90 mJ
u Max. 5.0 kV/s
u Fits to spark plugs with a ceramic diameter of 8
mm
u Max. 15,000 1/min
signed for direct cylinder head mounting. The C90i-E8
voltage.
Application
Spark energy 90 mJ
outer core
0 to 160C
2
at 50 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 168 mm
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
40 kV
Noise supression Inductive and 1 k resistance
Characteristic
Pin 1 U
batt
red
Wire length 100 cm
Wire size AWG 20/22
quest.
U
batt
I primary
10 A 12 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 20 A
6 V 3.2 4.5 7.6 9.8
8 V 1.88 2.49 3.47 3.79 4.10
10 V 1.35 1.76 2.34 2.51 2.67 3.05
12 V 1.06 1.35 1.77 1.89 2.00 2.24
14 V 0.87 1.11 1.43 1.52 1.60 1.79
16 V 0.74 0.93 1.20 1.28 1.34 1.49
16.5 V 0.71 0.90 1.15 1.23 1.29 1.43
18 V 0.64 0.81 1.03 1.10 1.15 1.27

2
Dwell time
10 A 41.4 mJ 0.74 ms 100 mA 31.6 kV
12 A 59.5 mJ 0.882 ms 122 mA 37.4 kV
15 A 84.4 mJ 1.034 ms 148 mA 45.7 kV
16 A 92.6 mJ 1.07 ms 158 mA 46 kV
17 A 100 mJ 1.09 ms 165 mA 46 kV
20 A 115 mJ 1.16 ms 190 mA 46 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Features
u Max. 40 kV
u Max. 90 mJ
u Max. 5.0 kV/s
u Fits to spark plugs with a ceramic diameter of 10
mm
u Max. 15,000 1/min
signed for direct cylinder head mounting. The C90i-E10
voltage.
Application
Spark energy 90 mJ
outer core
0 to 160C
2
at 50 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Length 168 mm
Electrical Data
1 M || 10 pF
40 kV
Noise supression Inductive and 1 k resistance
Characteristic
Pin 1 U
batt
red
Wire length 100 cm
Wire size AWG 20/22
quest.
U
batt
I primary
10 A 12 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 20 A
6 V 3.2 4.5 7.6 9.8
8 V 1.88 2.49 3.47 3.79 4.10
10 V 1.35 1.76 2.34 2.51 2.67 3.05
12 V 1.06 1.35 1.77 1.89 2.00 2.24
14 V 0.87 1.11 1.43 1.52 1.60 1.79
16 V 0.74 0.93 1.20 1.28 1.34 1.49
16.5 V 0.71 0.90 1.15 1.23 1.29 1.43
18 V 0.64 0.81 1.03 1.10 1.15 1.27

2
Dwell time
10 A 41.4 mJ 0.74 ms 100 mA 31.6 kV
12 A 59.5 mJ 0.882 ms 122 mA 37.4 kV
15 A 84.4 mJ 1.034 ms 148 mA 45.7 kV
16 A 92.6 mJ 1.07 ms 158 mA 46 kV
17 A 100 mJ 1.09 ms 165 mA 46 kV
20 A 115 mJ 1.16 ms 190 mA 46 kV
Spark energy
Installation Notes
page.
wires.

2
Dimensions

2
Ignition Module IM 3.1
Features
u Max. 3 cylinders
u 47 g
u Fits to all MS 4 ECUs
u Especially adapted for Coils PS, P35, P50(-M),
P65, 2x1, 2x2 and 3x2
This module is an external ignition power stage capable
of supplying up to three non-transistorized ignition coils.
The IM input signal should be supplied by an ECU with
ignition signal outputs in the range of 10 to 20 mA, e.g.
MS 4 Sport.
The IM unit combines the robustness of a high quality
production part with good electrical performance to
provide an ideal solution for adapting non-transistorized
coils to an ECU without internal ignition driver stages.
Application
Clamp voltage 380 30 V
measuring point
-40 to 120C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Size 70.5 x 68 x 20 mm
Weight w/o wire 47 g
Mounting 2 x M4 screws with spring wash-
er
Permissible fuel temperatures 70C
Electrical Data
U
Batt
typical 13.5 V
Voltage supply 6 to 16.5 V
I
B
high active on min. 10 mA
I
B
low off 0 mA
I
B
10 to 22 mA
I
C
typical 8.5 A
I
C
max. at T
U
< 120C < 10 A
U
CE
satt at I
C
= 5 A < 3 V
U
CE
satt at I
C
max < 9 V
Characteristic
Characteristic dwell time See characteristic dwell time
from the ignition coil used
Internal transistor Triple Darlington
Connector (Coil T1) Bosch Jetronic 3-pole
Mating connector 3-pole Jetron-
ic
D 261 205 289-01
Pin 1 Collector transistor 1
Connector (ECU) Bosch Jetronic 4-pole
Mating connector 4-pole Jetron-
ic
D 261 205 351-01
Pin 1 Basis transistor 3
Pin 2 Gnd
Installation Notes
This ignition module can be used with Coils PS, P35, P50(-M), P65,
2x1, 2x2, 3x2 or comparable coils.
Please ensure that the connectors are safe from water.
The IM has to be mounted onto a cooling body. The mounting surface
needs a planarity of 0.2 mm.
A heat conductive paste has to be used.
This ignition module is designed for use with engine control units
which have no integrated ignition transistor.
Please observe the specified limit values.
Please do not activate more than one ignition output stage parallel
within a module.
page.
Injection and Ignition | Ignition Modules | 149

2
Dimensions
150 | Injection and Ignition | Ignition Modules

2
Features
u Max. 3 cylinders
u 47 g
P65, 2x1, 2x2 and 3x2
of supplying up to three non-transistorized ignition coils.
MS 4 Sport.
Application
measuring point
-40 to 120C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
er
Electrical Data
U
Batt
typical 13.5 V
I
B
I
B
low off 0 mA
I
B
10 to 22 mA
I
C
typical 8.5 A
I
C
max. at T
U
< 120C < 10 A
U
CE
satt at I
C
= 5 A < 3 V
U
CE
satt at I
C
max < 9 V
Characteristic
Characteristic dwell time See characteristic dwell time
from the ignition coil used
Internal transistor Triple Darlington
Connector Bosch Jetronic 7-pole
Mating connector
7-pole Jetronic
F 02U B00 252-01
Pin 4 Gnd
Installation Notes
Please do not activate more than one ignition output stage parallel
within a module.
page.

2
Dimensions

2
Ignition Module IM 4
Features
u Max. 4 cylinders
u 54 g
P65, 2x1, 2x2 and 3x2
of supplying up to four non-transistorized ignition coils.
MS 4 Sport.
Application
measuring point
-40 to 120C
2
at 5 to 2,500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Size 70.5 x 68 x 20 mm
er
Electrical Data
U
Batt
typical 13.5 V
I
B
I
B
low off 0 mA
I
B
10 to 22 mA
I
C
typical < 8.5 A
I
C
max. at T
U
< 120C < 10 A
U
CE
satt at I
C
= 5 A < 3 V
U
CE
satt at I
C
max < 9 V
Connector (Coil T1) Bosch Jetronic 4-pole
Mating connector
Jetronic 4-pole
D 261 205 351-01
Connector (ECU) Bosch Jetronic 5-pole
Mating connector
Jetronic 5-pole
D 261 205 352-01
Pin 3 Gnd
Installation Notes
Ignition Module IM 4

2
Dimensions

2
Injection Valve EV 6
Features
u Single beam or twin beam
u Flow rate at 3 bar: up to 962 cm
3
/min
u Spray angle 15 to 70
EV 6 injection valves are designed to inject the fuel as
efficiently as possible into the intake manifold runner to
achieve a homogeneous distribution of fuel in air flow.
EV 6 injection valves feature high corrosion resistance
and excellent engine start characteristics. The hydraulic
connections of the Bosch injection valves EV 6, EV 12
and EV 14 are compatible.
Application
Fuel Filter Requirements
Particle size 5 m
Max. particle size 35 m
Separation rate 82 %
Mechanical Data
System pressure Max. 8 bar
Weight 55 g
Fuel input Top-feed injector
Climate-proof corresponding to saline fog test DIN 50 021
Housing design Standard (S), Long (L)
Spray type C (Conical Spray) or E (2-Spray)
Flow rate at 3 bar (n-heptane) 134 to 962 cm/min
92 to 658 g/min
Spray angle 15 to 70
Bent angle 0 to 20
Coil resistance 1.2 to 16
Fuel compatibility E85 / M100
(after Methanol-operating, the
valves must be flushed with nor-
mal gasoline-fuel)
Electrical Data
Power supply 6 to 16.5 V
Connectors Jetronic, Sumitomo, Motorsport
connectors
Installation Notes
Injectors with low resistance are only supplied with a peak and hold
power stage.
EV 6, 116 g/min n-heptane
Accessories
Clip for locking bush of plastic
Clip for locking bush of steel
Injection and Ignition | Injection Valves | 155

2
Dimensions
Spray Illustrations
EV6 Standard
156 | Injection and Ignition | Injection Valves

2
EV6 Long
Mounting Instructions


2
EV 6 Variations
Variations of production type valves
Part Nr. 0 280 156 194 0 280 155 868 0 280 155 830 0 280 156 063 0 280 156 012

Flow rate/min 116 g/170 cm
3
261 g/382 cm
3
261 g/382 cm
3
269 g/393 cm
3
310 g/453 cm
3
Type C C E E C
Housing S L L L S
80 15 15 20 15 20
0 0 0 10 5
- - 90 270 90
Resistance 14.5 12 12 12 12
Further variations are available on request
Variation of Motorsport valves
Part Nr. B 280 434 499-02

3
Type C
Housing S
80 25
0
-
Resistance 12
Further variations are available on request.

2
Features
u Single beam or twin beam
u Flow rate at 3 bar: up to 1,023 cm
3
/min
u With extension
EV 12 injection valves are designed to inject the fuel as
efficiently as possible into the intake manifold runner to
achieve a homogeneous distribution of fuel in air flow.
There is only one injector body size for the EV 12. Vari-
ous delivery rates and spray-angles are available. The in-
jection valves EV 6, EV 12 and EV 14 are compatible.
Mechanical Data
Weight 40 g
Installation length 48 mm (total 81 mm)
Housing design Standard with extension
Flow rate at 3 bar (n-heptane) 146 to 1,023 cm/min
59 to 670 g/min
Spray angle 5 to 60
Bent angle 0 to 17
Coil resistance 11 to 16
mal gasoline-fuel)
Electrical Data
connectors
Installation Notes
Accessories

2
Dimensions
Housing Variations
Spray Illustrations

2

2


2
EV 12 Variations
Part Nr. 0 280 157 002 0 280 157 012 0 280 155 897 0 280 155 892 0 280 157 000

3
193 g/282 cm
3
217 g/317 cm
3
269 g/393 cm
3
310 g/453 cm
3
Type E E E E E
Housing S S S S S
15 15 15 15 15
10 10 10 10 10
270 270 270 270 270
Resistance 12 12 12 12 12

2
Features
u Conical spray or 2-spray
3
/min
u With or without extension
EV 14 injection valves are the latest revision of the EV 6
injection valve technology. EV 14 xT are the latest revi-
sion of the EV 12.
EV 14 is designed for a wide range of flow rates and
spray patterns. Compact size and three standard ver-
sions simplify mounting in a variety of applications.
Mechanical Data
Weight 30 g
Installation lengths 33.6, 48.65 or 60.65 mm
Housing design Compact (C), Standard (S),
Long (L)
Flow rate at 3 bar (n-heptane) 146 to 1,023 cm/min
100 to 700 g/min
Bent angle 0 to 15
Coil resistance 12
mal gasoline-fuel)
Electrical Data
connectors
Installation Notes
Accessories

2
Dimensions
Spray Illustrations
Housing Variations

2

2


2
EV 14 Variations
Part Nr. 0 280 158 110 0 280 158 200 0 280 158 107 0 280 158 013 0 280 158 038

3
116 g/170 cm
3
150 g/219 cm
3
150 g/219 cm
3
237 g/347 cm
3
Type C E C E C
Housing L S L S KxT
15 15 20 19 20
0 0 0 0 0
0 90 0 90 0
Part Nr. 0 280 158 116 0 280 158 123 0 280 158 040

3
429 g/627 cm
3
670 g/980 cm
3
Type E E C
Housing L SxT KxT
22 25 30
5 0 0
90 90 0
Resistance 12 12 12
Further variations are available on request
Variations of Motorsport valves
Part Nr. B 280 436 038-07 B 280 436 038-08 B 280 436 038-09 B 280 436 038-10 B 280 436 469-01

3
503 g/736 cm
3
387 g/566 cm
3
387 g/566 cm
3
697 g/1,019 cm
3
Type C C C C E
Housing S S S S S
70 25 70 25 20
0 0 0 0 0
- - - - 90

2
Injection Valve EV 14i
Features
3
/min
u Extremely small housing
u Very low weight
u Special development for motorsports
EV 14i injection valves are the smallest Bosch low pres-
sure injection valves and especially developed for mo-
torsports applications.
The valve is designed for a wide range of flow rates and
spray patterns. Very compact size simplifies mounting in
a variety of applications.
Mechanical Data
Weight 20 g
Installation lengths 26.9 mm
Housing design Very compact
Flow rate at 3 bar (n-heptane) Max. 1,023 cm/min
Max. 700 g/min
Bent angle 0 to 15
Coil resistance 12
mal gasoline-fuel)
Electrical Data
Connectors Div. motorsports connectors
Installation Notes
Injection Valves EV 14i are manufactured on order only and are not on
stock. The minimum purchase quantity is 25 pieces per variation.
Injectors with low resistance are only supplied with a peak and hold
power stage.
EV 14i, 213 g/min n-heptane
Accessories
Extended tip

2
Dimensions
Spray Illustrations

2
EV 14i Variations
Part Nr. B 280 436 323-03 B 280 436 270-03 B 280 436 548-01 B 280 436 470-01

3
263 g/385 cm
3
261 g/382 cm
3
310 g/453 cm
3
Type C C E C
Housing i i ixT i
85 25 20 50
0 0 15 0
0 0 90 0
Resistance 12 12 12 12

2
HP Injection Valve HDEV 5.2
Features
u Max. 200 bar
u Multi hole
3
/min (n-hep-
tane)
The HDEV 5.2 is a high pressure injector, which is devel-
oped to be used as a port or a direct injector.
The function of the HDEV 5.2 is both to meter out the
fuel and to obtain a well-defined mixture of fuel and air.
It is an inward opening solenoid injector which is opti-
mized regarding very short opening and closing times
which ensures a very stable linearity at short injection
times.
The benefit of this injector is a high spray variability con-
cerning spray angle and spray shape. Also the flow rate
can be defined in a big range. Bosch offers the spray
targeting design according to the individual customer re-
quirements. If your application conditions will not match
the listed performance data, please ask for consultancy
at Bosch Motorsport. In addition to the specific de-
signed sample, Bosch offers cost effective production
HDEV 5.2 on request.
Application
Application 308 to 1,026 g/min at 100 bar
(typical)
Fuel Gasoline
Operating pressure 200 bar
Mechanical Data
Diameter 20.7 mm
Length 87 mm
Flow rate at 100 bar (n-heptane) up to 1,500 cm
3
/min
Number of holes 4 to 7 holes (typical)
Spray type Multi hole
Spray angle overall 110 (typical)
Spray angle single beam 8 to 20
Static flow tolerance 5 %
Dynamic flow tolerance 6 % at ti = 1.5 ms
Leakage 2.5 mm/min at 23C
Electrical Data
Booster supply 65 to 90 V
Booster current 13.2 A
Booster time 500 s
Power supply 12 V
Pick up current 9.6 A
Pick up time 800 s
Hold power supply 12 V
Hold current 3.0 A hysteresis 0.8 A
Coil resistance 1,500 m (ambient temp.)
Mating connector Compact D 261 205 359-01
Connector Jetronic (wire) D 261 205 288-01
Connector motorsports (wire) On request
Pin 1 Pos
Pin 2 Gnd
Installation Notes
The injector has to be supplied by a Bosch Motorsport Power Stage
Unit (e.g. HPI 5 or HPI 1.16).
Listed electrical values may vary according to the application.
The injector can be cleaned (mechanically or chemically), if the tip will
not be damaged.
Do not use supersonic cleaning.

2
Dimensions
Spray variations, further variations on request

2
LC
Features
u Max. 200 bar
u Multi hole
3
/min (n-hep-
tane)
The HDEV 5.2 LC is a high pressure injector, which is
developed to be used as a port or a direct injector.
The function of the HDEV 5.2 LC is both to meter out
the fuel and to obtain a well-defined mixture of fuel and
air. It is an inward opening solenoid injector which is
optimized regarding very short opening and closing
times which ensures a very stable linearity at short in-
jection times.
The benefit of this injector is a high spray variability con-
cerning spray angle and spray shape. Also the flow rate
can be defined in a big range. Bosch offers the spray
targeting design according to the individual customer re-
quirements. If your application conditions will not match
the listed performance data, please ask for consultancy
at Bosch Motorsport. In addition to the specific de-
signed sample, Bosch offers cost effective production
HDEV 5.2 LC on request.
Application
Application 308 to 1,026 g/min at 100 bar
(typical)
Fuel Gasoline
Operating pressure 200 bar
Mechanical Data
Weight w/o wire 221.5 g
Diameter 20.7 mm
Length 185 mm
Flow rate at 100 bar (n-heptane) Up to 1,500 cm
3
/min
Number of holes 4 to 7 holes (typical)
Spray type Multi hole
Spray angle overall 110 (typical)
Spray angle single beam 8 to 20
Static flow tolerance 5 %
Dynamic flow tolerance 6 % at ti = 1.5 ms
Leakage 2.5 mm/min at 23C
Electrical Data
Booster supply 65 to 90 V
Booster current 13.2 A
Booster time 500 s
Power supply 12 V
Pick up current 9.6 A
Pick up time 800 s
Hold power supply 12 V
Hold current 3.0 A hysteresis 0.8 A
Coil resistance 1,500 m (ambient temp.)
Mating connector Compact On request
Connector Jetronic (wire) D 261 205 288-01
Connector motorsports (wire) On request
Pin 1 Pos
Pin 2 Gnd
Installation Notes
The injector has to be supplied by a Bosch Motorsport Power Stage
Unit (e.g. HPI 5 or HPI 1.16).
Listed electrical values may vary according to the application.
The injector can be cleaned (mechanically or chemically), if the tip will
not be damaged.
Do not use supersonic cleaning.
HP Injection Valve HDEV 5.2 LC

2
Dimensions
Spray variations, further variations on request

2

2
Alternators and Starters 3

Alternators 178

Starters 190

Alternator 90 A
Features
u 5,400 g
u 90 A
u Clockwise rotation
u Special light weight aluminum pulley available
This alternator is modified for motorsport demand. It is
a clockwise rotation type and is series part in the Por-
sche Cup cars. We deliver the alternator inclusive fan
and pulley. Modifications are available on request.
Application
Vibration protection high
Installation without rubber mounting.
Mechanical Data
Case material aluminum
Weight 5,400 g
Current regulator unit integrated
Rotation Clockwise
Max. rotations 18,000 x 1/min
Diameter 108 mm
Length without shaft stub 128 mm
Distance between mounting
points
154 mm
Electrical Data
Rated current 90 A
Output voltage 14 V
Cut-in speed 1,300 x 1/min
Coupling screws
Characteristic 110 A
Rpm [1/min] I
G
[A] at 25C
1,000 0
1,300 15.5
1,500 32.5
1,700 44.8
2,000 58.5
3,000 76.0
4,000 85.0
5,000 88.5
6,000 90.0
7,000 90.3
8,000 90.5
9,000 90.5
10,000 90.5
15,000 90.5
20,000 90.5
Alternator 90 A
Order number 0 124 B00 160
178 | Alternators and Starters | Alternators

3
Dimensions
Alternators and Starters | Alternators | 179

3
Alternator B3
Features
u With multifunctional regulator
u 4,800 g
u 210 A *
The B3 is a powerful 12 V motorsport alternator. It has
an optimized hand wound stator winding (3 phase trian-
gle), high current diodes (special Zener diode chips
from Bosch production to retain load-dumps) and an ex-
tra fine balanced rotor with double impregnated wind-
ing.
The multifunctional regulator (special Bosch developed
ASIC) controls the alternator output voltage at B + con-
nection. The main benefit of this alternator is the high
power output in a small low weight package. Further-
more it is optimized concerning vibration endurance.
Application
Application 210 A * at 10,000 rpm/90C
Max. ambient temperature 105C, high current only with
supported cooling air
Max. ambient temperature
(short-term)
120C, high current only with
Rotating direction Clockwise
Mechanical Data
Body material Cast aluminum
Weight w/o pulley 4.8 kg
Moment of inertia 22 kg*cm
2
Outer diameter w/o screw 136 mm
Length w/o pulley 117 mm
Battery B+ connection M8x1.25
Tightening torque at B+ 22 Nm
Electrical Data
Regulating voltage 14.2 V
Temperature compensation -10 mV/K
High temperature cut off derat-
ing
-250 mV/K
Excitation resistor (L) Internal (external on request)
Cut-in-speed 3,000 x 1/min
Characteristic
Rpm [1/min] I
G
[A] at 90C
3,000 40
3,500 93
4,000 125
5,000 162
6,000 182
7,000 193
8,000 201
9,000 206
10,000 210
11,000 213
12,000 215
14,000 217
16,000 219
18,000 222
Please note: Measured with U=13.1 V and t=20 min
Installation Notes
Ground connection for power and regulator is through the case. En-
sure that the case has a high current, low electrical resistance connec-
tion to vehicle ground.
Operating the alternator is only permitted with the installed regulator
and a connected 12 V battery (Lithium battery not proved).

3
The excitation current can also be realized by an external lamp (on re-
quest).
Rectifier diodes are designed and proved for B+ continuous output
current of 210 A. The alternator is able to support more current, but
this must be restricted for short time to prevent the destroying of rec-
tifier diodes.
Alternator B3
Dimensions

3

3
Alternator B3 LIN
Features
u Electrically and mechanically identical with B3
u Motorsports optimized LIN2.1 regulator with latest
ASIC technology
u 4,800 g
u 210 A *
The B3 LIN is a powerful 12 V motorsport alternator. It
has an optimized hand wound stator winding (3 phase
triangle), high current diodes (special Zener diode chips
from Bosch production to retain load-dumps) and an ex-
tra fine balanced rotor with double impregnated wind-
ing.
The LIN regulator (special Bosch developed ASIC) con-
trols the alternator output voltage at B + connection.
The main benefit of this alternator is the high power
output in a small low weight package. Furthermore it is
optimized concerning vibration endurance.
Application
Application 210 A * at 10,000 rpm/90C
Max. ambient temperature 105C, high current only with
Max. ambient temperature
(short-term)
120C, high current only with
Rotating direction Clockwise
Fixed frequency regulation with pulse width modulation
Stand-by-mode
Switching-on via LIN interface
High side output stage with defined ramp steepness and FET as free-
wheeling diode
Emergency start and default mode
Adjustable set values via LIN interface
Outputs of status information via LIN interface
Mechanical Data
Body material Cast aluminum
Weight w/o pulley 4.8 kg
Moment of inertia 22 kg*cm
2
Outer diameter w/o screw 136 mm
Length w/o pulley 117 mm
Battery B+ connection M8x1.25
Electrical Data
Regulating voltage 14.2 V
Temperature compensation -10 mV/K
High temperature cut off derat-
ing
-250 mV/K
Excitation resistor (L) Internal (external on request)
Cut-in-speed 3,000 x 1/min
Characteristic
Rpm [1/min] I
G
[A] at 90C
3,000 40
3,500 93
4,000 125
5,000 162
6,000 182
7,000 193
8,000 201
9,000 206
10,000 210
11,000 213
12,000 215
14,000 217
16,000 219
18,000 222
Please note: Measured with U=13.1 V and t=20 min

3
Installation Notes
Ground connection for power and regulator is through the case. En-
sure that the case has a high current, low electrical resistance connec-
tion to vehicle ground.
Operating the alternator is only permitted with the installed regulator
and a connected 12 V battery (Lithium battery not proved).
The excitation current can also be realized by an external lamp (on re-
quest).
Rectifier diodes are designed and proved for B+ continuous output
current of 210 A. The alternator is able to support more current, but
this must be restricted for short time to prevent the destroying of rec-
tifier diodes.
Alternator B3 LIN

3
Dimensions

Housing Generator Electrical
System

G
KL 15
LIN
B+

V
DF

B+

B
-
LIN
Master
EMC -circuit

Regulator -IC
C3

EMV
EMV
C1

C2
U
Schematic Diagram

3
Alternator GCM1
Features
u 3,400 g
u 110 to 140 A
u Clockwise or anticlockwise rotation
u Special light weight aluminum pulley available
This alternator is modified for motorsport demand and
splash protected. The stator windings are handmade
and optimized for higher current output; the rotor is ex-
tra fine balanced and double impregnated. The alterna-
tors are e.g. used in Nascar series. Clockwise and anti-
clockwise versions are possible, modifications are avail-
able on request.
Application
Ambient temperature range -30 to 90C
Vibration protection high
Installation without rubber mounting.
Mechanical Data
Case material aluminum
Weight 3,400 g
Current regulator unit integrated
Diameter 108 mm
Length without shaft stub 128 mm
Distance between mounting
points
154 mm
Electrical Data
Rated current 110/130/140 A
Output voltage 13.5 V
Cut-in speed 3,000 x 1/min
Coupling screws
Battery B+ M6
Control lamp D+ flat-pin connector, see drawing
Internal D+ resistor only GCM1 140 A Nascar
Rpm [1/min] I
G
[A] at 90C
2,000 0
2,500 13
3,000 37
3,500 54
4,000 65
5,000 78
6,000 88
7,000 96
8,000 102
9,000 105
10,000 108
12,000 113
15,000 117
18,000 120
Rpm [1/min] I
G
[A] at 90C
2,000 0
2,500 6
3,000 32

3
3,500 51
4,000 63
5,000 80
6,000 90
7,000 98
8,000 105
9,000 111
10,000 116
12,000 121
15,000 127
18,000 131
Characteristic 140 A / Nascar
Rpm [1/min] I
G
[A] at 90C
2,000 0
2,500 0
3,000 1
3,500 25
4,000 49
5,000 83
6,000 101
7,000 113
8,000 122
9,000 129
10,000 135
12,000 144
15,000 151
18,000 156
Installation Notes
An external cooling can contribute to increase the per-
formance. It will only be effective if the incoming air is
30Kelvin cooler than the ambient air. Otherwise, the re-
striction of air flow will negate any cooling benefits. If
these conditions are met, the cooling air should be dis-
tributed over the center axis at the rear of the alternator
for optimal cooling. The alternator fans are not able to
generate negative pressure. It is possible to use external
blower to support the alternator. Debris at alternator
cooling area can reduce cooling effect. This could also
shorten the alternator service life. Installation without
rubber mounting.
110 A anticlockwise rotation
110 A clockwise rotation
Order number F 01E B01 857-02
140 A Nascar clockwise rotation

3
Dimensions
Design 110/ 130 /140 A

3
Design 140 A Nascar

3
Starter 1.4 kW
Features
u 1.4 kW
u 3,600 x 1/min
This starter is specially constructed for motorsport de-
mand. It is a pre-engaged drive starter; we offer it in
clockwise and counter-clockwise version.
Further special versions on request.
Application
Max. temperature 150C
Vibration High protection
Mechanical Data
Weight 3,200 g
Revolutions 3,600 x 1/min
Modul 2,11
Electrical Data
Performance 1.4 kW
Starter 1.4 kW
190 | Alternators and Starters | Starters

3
Dimensions
Alternators and Starters | Starters | 191

3
Starter 1.7 kW
Features
u 1.7 kW
u 3,600 x 1/min
Application
Max. temperature 150 C
Mechanical Data
Weight 3,700 g
Module 2,11
Electrical Data
Performance 1.7 kW
Starter 1.7 kW

3
Dimensions

3
Starter 2.0 kW
Features
u 2.0 kW
u 4,700 x 1/min
Application
Max. temperature 150 C
Mechanical Data
Weight 4,050 g
Module 2,11
Electrical Data
Performance 2.0 kW
Starter 2.0 kW

3
Dimensions

3

3
Sensors 4

Absolute Position Sensor 198

Current Sensor 200

Dynamic Vehicle Sensors 202

Gear Shift Sensor 215

Knock Sensors 217

Lambda Sensors 221

Linear Potentiometers 233

Pressure Sensors Air 253

Pressure Sensors Fluid 269

Rotary Potentiometers 293

Speed Sensors 309

Temperature Sensors 333

Thermocouple Probes 353

Wire Potentiometers 360

Absolute Position Sensor APS-
C
Features
u Contactless technology
u CAN output
u Signal resolution: 0.7
u Wide operating temperature range
This sensor is designed to measure the absolute angular
position of a still standing or rotating shaft.
The device uses Hall sensor technology to detect the
magnetic flux density distribution of a magnet which is
mounted frontal on the shaft. The absolute angle posi-
tion value from the sensor is transmitted over CAN. The
sensor can be calibrated and configured with hard- and
software tools.
The main feature and benefit of this sensor is the combi-
nation of a contactless measuring principal, a wide tem-
perature range and a motorsport connector.
Application
Measuring range 0 to 360
Measuring principle Hall-effect
Angle reference type Absolute
Signal revolution 0.703152
Mechanical Data
Fixation 3 x M5
Sealing O-ring
Size w/o wire See Dimensions
Storage temperature range -40 to 120 C
Operating temperature range -40 to 120 C
sport.com)
Electrical Data
Power supply (6.5) 10 to 17 V
Current 70 mA
Environment
Magnet for APS-C F 02U 002 465-01
Connector ASL 6-03-05PB-HE
Mating connector
ASL 0-03-05SB-HE
F 02U 000 207-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 CAN+
Pin 4 CAN-
Pin 5 Calibration pin
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Wire length 15 to 100 cm
Various motorsport and automotive connectors available on request.
Installation Notes
The sensor is designed to measure the absolute angle of the camshaft
e.g. quick start application.
The unit can be connected to any CAN system (1 MBaud).
The unit is secure from miss-pinning.
Before the first operation, the sensor has to be calibrated. Please con-
nect the calibration pin to 12 V.
To meet the specifications and to avoid errors, the distance between
sensor and the magnet has to be less than 2 mm.
To avoid measurement errors, the eccentricity between sensor and
magnet has to be as small as possible (< 0.3 mm).
To change the CAN-ID of the sensor, it can be programmed by the ex-
ternal CAN module EM-C.
The angle position value can be set to zero via the external CAN mod-
ule EM-C or by using the calibration pin.
Please note that for a correct functionality of the sensor a magnet with
a material remanence of 1.03 Tesla is needed (not included, available
on request).
page.
Communication
Communication link CAN
Application tool EM-C or RaceCon
Signal output CAN
198 | Sensors | Absolute Position Sensor

4
CAN Baud rate 1 Mbaud
CAN refresh rate 700 Hz
Absolute Position Sensor APS-C
Dimensions
Sensors | Absolute Position Sensor | 199

4
Current Sensor CS 240
Features
u Current measurement up to 240 A
u Single supply voltage
u Very good linearity
u No additional resistance inside the loom
u Low thermal offset and gain drift
This sensor is developed for DC and pulsed currents
measurements. The advantage is the single power sup-
ply and no additional resistance.
Application
Application Current 0 to 240 A [I
P
]
Max. frequency DC to 80 Hz at -3 db
Load resistance >10 k
Output type Analog
2
at 5 to 200 Hz
Mechanical Data
Bore diameter 19 mm / 15.5 mm
Installation length 37.5 mm
Mounting Direct on the wire
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max. power supply 8.5 V (14 V; 1 min at 25C)
Max. continuous output current 10 mA
Typical output current 7.5 mA at 5 V
Characteristic
Sensitivity [G] 16.67 mV/A
Output drift vs. power supply 0.5 %
Power up time 25 to 110 ms
Resolution 2.5 mV at U
S
=5 V
Output voltage V
out
=U
S
/5 x (0.5 + G x I
P
); at U
S
Pin A/1 (red) DC supply voltage
Pin B/2 (blue) Ground
Pin C/3 (green) Output signal
Mating connector kit
Series type
LEM current sensor 3pol
F 02U B00 641-01
Output
Installation Notes
Application Notes
Please ensure that the environmental conditions do not exceed the
sensor specifications.
page.
200 | Sensors | Current Sensor

4
Series type connector (no wire)
With Connector ASL 6-06-05PN-HE
Open end (flying wires)
Dimensions
Dimensions
Accuracy
Sensors | Current Sensor | 201

4
Acceleration Sensor AM 600-2
Features
u 2 -axis
u Measurement range: 4.5 g
u 5 Hz low-pass filtered
This sensor is designed to measure the physical effects
of lateral acceleration in two axes (e.g. for analysis of
acceleration and deceleration behavior of race cars).
In order to achieve this, the sensor features two measur-
ing elements for acceleration, in two integrated circuits.
The sensing element consists of a micro machined sen-
sor chip and an evaluation ASIC allowing for high pre-
cision measurement applications.
efficiency.
Application
Measuring range x, y 4.5 g
Max. vibration 5,000 m/s
2
in operation
Mechanical Data
Size 24 x 27 x 13.5 mm
Mounting 2 x M3
Tightening torque 2 Nm
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Power supply max. 6 V
Full scale output 2.5 = 0 g; 440 mV/g
Supply current 7 mA
Supply current max. 12 mA
Characteristic
Sensitivity 440 mV/g
Offset 2,500 mV at 0 g
Tolerance of sensitivity 3 %
Non-linearity of sensitivity 2 %
Connector ASL 6-06-05PA-HE
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
x
Pin 4 Sig
y
Pin 5 Scr
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
The AM 600-2 can be connected directly to most control units and da-
ta logging systems.
Please avoid abrupt temperature changes.
For mounting please use only the integrated fixed hole.
page.
202 | Sensors | Dynamic Vehicle Sensors

4
Dimensions
Sensors | Dynamic Vehicle Sensors | 203

4
Features
u 3 -axis
u Measurement range: 4,5 g
of lateral acceleration in three axes (e.g. for analysis of
acceleration and deceleration behavior of race cars).
In order to achieve this, the sensor features three meas-
uring elements for acceleration, in three integrated cir-
cuits. The sensing element consists of a micro machined
sensor chip and an evaluation ASIC allowing for high
precision measurement applications.
efficiency.
Application
Measuring range x, y, z 4.5 g
2
in operation
Mechanical Data
Size 24 x 27 x 29.8 mm
Mounting 2 x M3
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Full scale output 2.5 = 0 g; 440 mV/g
Supply current 7 mA
Supply current max. 12 mA
Characteristic
Sensitivity 440 mV/g
Offset 2,500 mV at 0 g
Tolerance of sensitivity 3 %
Non-linearity of sensitivity 2 %
Mating connector
ASL 6-06-05PA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
y
Pin 4 Sig
x
Pin 5 Sig
z
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
The AM 600-3 can be connected directly to most control units and da-
ta logging systems.
For mounting please use only the integrated fixed hole.
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Acceleration Sensor MM5.10
Features
u 2-axis rotation rate (yaw-rate, roll-rate)
u 3-axis accelerometer (X, Y, Z)
u 1 Mbaud or 500 kbaud CAN-output
u Measurement ranges: 4.2 g; 163/s
The MM5.10 was designed to measure the physical ef-
fects of rotational and lineal acceleration. In order to
achieve this, the sensor includes MEMS measuring ele-
ments connected to an appropriate integrated circuit.
A rotational acceleration around the integrated sensing
elements generates a Coriolis force which changes the
internal capacity of the micromachined sensing parts.
Furthermore, a pure surface micromachined element is
used to measure the vehicle lineal acceleration in all 3
axis. This combination of rotational and lineal accelera-
tion sensors enables a precise measurement of the vehi-
cle dynamics.
nation of 3 lineal and 2 rotational accelerometers and its
high speed 1 Mbaud/s CAN-signal output.
Application
Application I 163/s (roll rate/yaw rate)
Application II 4.2 g (X, Y and Z acceleration)
Mechanical Data
Electrical Data
Power supply 7 to 18 V
Max input current 90 mA
CAN speed 1 Mbaud/s or 500 kbaud/s
CAN Message
CAN ID 01 0x174
Byte Value
0 Yaw rate
1
2 Reserved
3
4 Acc Y-axis
5
6 Reserved
7 Unused
CAN ID 02 0x178
Byte Value
0 Roll rate
1
2 Reserved
3
4 Acc X-axis
5
6 Reserved
7 Unused
CAN ID 02 0x17C
Byte Value
0 Reserved
1
2 Reserved
3
4 Acc Z-axis
5
6 Reserved
7 Unused
Characteristic
Characteristic Application I
Measuring range 160/s
Over range limit 1,000/s
Absolute resolution 0.1/s

4
Cut-off frequency (-3 dB) 15 Hz; 30 Hz; 60 Hz
Characteristic Application II
Measuring range 4.2 g
Over range limit 10 g
Absolute resolution 0.01 g
Cut-off frequency (-3 dB) 15 Hz; 30 Hz; 60 Hz
Connector (1) AMP 114-18063-076
Mating connector (1) F 02U B00 435-01
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 CANL
Pin 3 CANH
Pin 4 UBat
Connector (3) ASL-6-06-05PC-HE
Mating connector (3) ASL-0-06-05SC-HE
Pin 1 UBat
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 CANH
Pin 4 CANL
Pin 5 Not connected
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Wire length L 15 to 100 cm
CAN Parameters
Byte order LSB (Intel)
CAN speed 1 Mbaud/s or 500 kbaud/s
Bit mask unsigned
Offset (all signals) 0x8000 hex
Quantization Yaw Rate 0.005 [/s/digit]
Quantization Roll Rate 0.005 [/s/digit]
Quantization Acc X-axis 0.0001274 [g/digit]
Quantization Acc Y-axis 0.0001274 [g/digit]
Quantization Acc Z-ais 0.0001274 [g/digit]
Installation Notes
The MM5.10 can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems.
For mounting please use only the integrated fixing holes.
page and calibration sheet.
Please deliver the calibration sheet with your order placement.
Acceleration Sensor MM5.10 (1)
Without wire
Wire with open end
Wire with motorsports connector

4
Dimensions
Axis Scheme

4
Lean Angle Sensor LAS-1
Features
u Yaw-rate, roll-rate and acceleration measurements
u 2-axis accelerometer
u CAN-output
This sensor is designed to measure the acceleration and
the rate of turn in two axis (yaw rate
z
, roll rate
x
, lat-
eral acceleration a
y
and longitudinal acceleration a
z
).
An internal diagnosis indicates too high vibrations or
turning rates. In combination with a MS 5 ECU and its
algorithm a very precise lean angle of motorcycles can
be calculated.
The main feature and benefit of this sensor is its wide
measuring range, the standardized 1 Mbaud CAN- signal
output and the combination of high quality production
part and robust design.
Application
Application I 160/s (roll rate/yaw rate)
Application II 4.1 g (X and Y acceleration)
Mechanical Data
Electrical Data
Power up time < 150 ms
CAN Message
CAN ID 01 0x174
Byte Value
0 Yaw Rate
1
2 Yaw STAT
3 Reserved
4 Acc Y
5
6 Acc Y STAT
7 Unused
CAN ID 02 0x178
Byte Value
0 Roll Rate
1
2 Roll STAT
3 Reserved
4 Acc X
5
6 AccX STAT
7 Unused
Characteristic
Measuring range 160/s
Over range limit 1,000/s
Absolute resolution 0.1/s
Cut-off frequency (-3 dB) 15 Hz
Characteristic Application II
Connector AMP 114-18063-076
Pin 1 GND
Pin 2 CANL
Pin 3 CANH
Pin 4 UBAT

4
CAN Parameters
Byte order Little endian, high-byte/low-
byte, Intel
CAN speed 1 MBaud
CAN refresh rate 10 ms
Identifier length 11 bit
Bit mask signed
Quantization Yaw Rate 0.005 [/s/digit]
Quantization Roll Rate 0.005 [/s/digit]
Quantization Acc X-Axis 0.0001274 [g/digit]
Quantization Acc Y-Axis 0.0001274 [g/digit]
Conversion formula
Yaw rate [/s] = (Hex-value 8000 h) * 0.005 [/s/digit]
Roll rate [/s] = (Hex-value 8000 h) * 0.005 [/s/digit]
Bit combination of sensor status
Yaw_STAT, Roll_STAT, AccY_STAT and ACCX_STAT
Xx00 xxxx = signal in specification
Xx01 xxxx = sensor not available
Xx10 xxxx = signal failure
Xx11 xxxx = reserved
X1xx xxxx = initialization is running
X0xx xxxx = initialization is ready
1xxx xxxx = reserved
0xxx xxxx = reserved
Installation Notes
Important: In order not to exceed the maximum vibration level, the
mount should be damped and not resonate.
For measuring the yaw and roll rate the LAS-1 can be connected di-
rectly to most control units and data logging systems.
The lean angle of motorcycles can be calculated in a MS 5 with motor-
cycle functionality.
page.
Lean Angle Sensor LAS-1

4
Dimensions

4
Yaw Rate Sensor YRS 3
Features
u Yaw rate and acceleration measurement
u CAN output
of yawing, lateral and longitudinal acceleration. In order
to achieve this, the sensor features both a measuring el-
ement for yaw rate and two for acceleration, with one
appropriate integrated circuit.
A rotation around the third orthogonal axis, a yaw rate,
creates a Coriolis force on the accelerometers, which is
detected by the element. Apart from the measuring ele-
ment for yaw rate, a pure surface micro machined meas-
uring element for acceleration is utilized to measure the
vehicles lateral and longitudinal acceleration. This ena-
bles a very precise application.
The main feature and benefit of this sensor is its wide
measuring range, the standardized 1 Mbaud/s CAN-sig-
nal output and the combination of high quality produc-
tion part and robust design.
Application
Application I 160/s
Application II 4.1 g
Mechanical Data
Electrical Data
CAN speed 1 Mbaud/s
CAN Message
CAN_ID_01 0x70
Byte Value
0 Yaw Rate 1
1
2 Reserved
3
4 Acc Y-axis
5
6 Reserved
7 Unused
CAN_ID_02 0x80
Byte Value
0 Yaw Angular Acceleration
1
2 Reserved
3
4 Acc X-axis
5
6 Reserved
7 Unused
Characteristic
Measuring range 160 /s
Over range limit 1,000 /s
Absolute resolution 0.1 /s
Characteristic Application I I

4
Connector AMP 114-18063-076
Mating connector
4-pole DRS
F 02U B00 435-01 (connector
kit)
F 02U 002 460-01 (connector
housing)
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 CANL
Pin 3 CANH
Pin 4 UBat
CAN Parameters
Byte order LSB (Intel)
CAN speed 1 MBaud/s
Bit mask signed
Quantization Yaw Rate 1 0.005 [/s/digit]
Quantization Yaw Ang. Acc 0.125 [/s
2
/digit]
Quantization Acc X-axis 0.0001274 [g/digit]
Quantization Acc Y-axis 0.0001274 [g/digit]
Installation Notes
The YRS 3 can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems.
The sensor is protected against reverse polarity and short-circuits.
page.
Yaw Rate Sensor YRS 3

4
Dimensions

4
Gear Shift Sensor GSS-2
Features
u Strain gauge technology
u Measurement range: -450 to 450 N
u Analog output
This sensor is designed to measure force relative to gear
shifting in order to control the engine operation allow-
ing the driver to maintain no-lift-shift/full throttle during
shifting (up and down).
A circuit of precise resistors and an integrated amplifier
supply a force dependent output voltage signal. As soon
as this signal exceeds a certain threshold value in the
ECU, the ignition and injection can be adjusted automat-
ically according to the individual ECU application.
nation of high quality production part and robust design
with metal housing and motorsport spec connection.
Furthermore this sensor has a dual way functionality.
Application
Measuring range -450 to 450 N
2
at 5 Hz to 2 kHz
Operating temperature range 0 to 80C
Mechanical Data
Mounting 2 x M10 x 1
Mech. range programmable up
to
450 N
F
max
800 N
Mech. load limit 1800 N
Max. cycles at 300 N 300,000 cycles
Electrical Data
Power supply 12 V
Characteristic
Signal Output 0,5 to 4,5 V
Zero Output 2,5 V
Connector ASL 6-06-05PC-HE
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 Scr
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Sensor voltage
Force (N) Voltage (V)
450 4.673
360 4.225
270 3.797
180 3.397
90 2.941
0 2.538
-90 2.141
-180 1.672
-270 1.255
-360 0.820
-450 0.402
Sensors | Gear Shift Sensor | 215

4
Installation Notes
The GSS-2 can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems.
For mounting please use only the integrated thread.
page.
Gear Shift Sensor GSS-2
Dimensions
216 | Sensors | Gear Shift Sensor

4
Knock Sensor KS-P
Features
u Engine vibration measurements
u Measurement range 1 to 20 kHz
u Robust design
u Integrated series connector
This sensor is used for detecting structural born vibra-
tions in spark ignition engines due to uncontrolled com-
bustion. This sensor is suitable for operation in extreme
conditions.
Due to the inertia of the seismic mass, the sensor moves
in correlation to the engine block vibration; this motion
results in a compressive force which is converted into a
voltage signal via a piezoceramic sensor element. As a
result, upper and lower voltage thresholds can be de-
fined directly correlating to an acceleration magnitude.
The main benefits of this sensor are its robust mechani-
cal design, compact housing and precise determination
of structure-related noise. The small packaging is ac-
complished by integrating the connector directly to the
sensor.
Application
Application 1 to 20 kHz
Storage temperature range 0 to 100C
2
Mechanical Data
Male thread (for cast) M8x25
Male thread (for AI) M8x30
Installation torque 205 Nm
Protection IP 54
Electrical Data
Range of frequency 1 to 20 kHz
Sensitivity at 5 kHz 26 8 mV/g
Max. sensitivity changing (life-
time)
-17 %
Linearity between 5 to 15 kHz
(from 5 kHz value)
-10 to 20 %
(linear increasing with freq)
20 to 50 %
Main resonance frequency > 25 kHz
Impedance > 1 M
Temperature dependence of
sensitivity
0,06 mV/gC
Capacity field 800 to 1400 pF
Connector Y 280 A62 566A
Connector loom
2-pole Compact
D 261 205 337-01
Pin 1 Sig+
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Scr
Installation Notes
The KS-P can be connected to all Bosch Motorsport ECUs featuring
knock control
The sensor must rest directly on the brass compression sleeve during
operation.
To ensure low-resonance coupling of the sensor to the measurement
location, the contact surface must be clean and properly machined to
provide a secure flush mounting.
The sensor wire is to be routed such that no resonance vibration can
occur.
page.
Knock Sensor KS-P
Sensors | Knock Sensors | 217

4
Dimensions
218 | Sensors | Knock Sensors

4
Knock Sensor KS-R
Features
u Engine vibration measurements
u Measurement range 1 to 20 kHz
u Robust design
This sensor is used for detecting structural born vibra-
tions in spark ignition engines due to uncontrolled com-
bustion. This sensor is suitable for operation in extreme
conditions.
Due to the inertia of the seismic mass, the sensor moves
in correlation to the engine block vibration; this motion
results in a compressive force which is converted into a
voltage signal via a piezoceramic sensor element. As a
result, upper and lower voltage thresholds can be de-
fined directly correlating to an acceleration magnitude.
The main benefits of this sensor are its robust mechani-
cal design, compact housing and precise determination
of structure-related noise. Connection to this sensor can
be tailored to customer requirements through specified
wire lengths and various connector options.
Application
Application 1 to 20 kHz
2
Mechanical Data
Male thread (for cast) M8x25
Male thread (for AI) M8x30
Installation torque 20 5 Nm
Protection IP 54
Electrical Data
Range of frequency 1 to 20 kHz
Sensitivity at 5 kHz 26 8 mV/g
Max. sensitivity changing (life-
time)
-17 %
(from 5 kHz value)
-10 to 20 %
(linear increasing with freq)
20 to 50 %
Main resonance frequency > 25 kHz
Impedance > 1 M
Temperature dependence of
sensitivity
0,06 mV/gC
Capacity field 800 to 1400 pF
Connector A 261 230 076
Mating connector
3-pole Jetronic
D 261 205 289-01
Pin 1 Sig +
Pin 2 Sig -
Pin 3 Scr
Sleeve Elastomer
Wire size AWG 24
Wire length L 50 cm
Various motorsport and automotive connectors on request.
Installation Notes
The KS-P can be connected to all Bosch Motorsport ECUs featuring
knock control
The sensor must rest directly on the brass compression sleeve during
operation.
To ensure low-resonance coupling of the sensor to the measurement
location, the contact surface must be clean and properly machined to
provide a secure flush mounting.
The sensor wire is to be routed such that no resonance vibration can
occur.
page.
Knock Sensor KS-R
Sensors | Knock Sensors | 219

4
Dimensions
220 | Sensors | Knock Sensors

4
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.2
Features
u Application: lambda 0.65 to
u Wide-band
u Exhaust gas temperature range (max.) for short
time <1,030C
u Max. Hexagon temperature 570C
This sensor is designed to measure the proportion of
oxygen in exhaust gases of automotive gasoline engines.
The wide band lambda sensor LSU 4.2 is a planar ZrO
2
dual cell limiting current sensor with integrated heater.
Its monotonic output signal in the range of lambda 0.65
to air makes the LSU capable of being used as a univer-
sal sensor for lambda 1 measurement as well as for oth-
er lambda ranges. The connector module contains a
trimming resistor, which defines the characteristic of
the sensor.
The main benefit of the LSU is the very robust design
combined with the high Bosch production quality stand-
ard.
This lambda sensor operates only in combination with a
special LSU-IC, used in most Bosch Motorsport ECUs
and lambda control units like LT4. Youll find this unit
and more on our homepage at Accessories/Expansion
Modules.
Application
Application lambda 0.65 to
Fuel compatibility Gasoline
Exhaust gas temperature range
(operating)
930C
(max.) for short time
< 1,030C
Hexagon temperature < 570C
Cable and protective sleeve tem-
perature
< 250C
Connector temperature < 120C
Max. vibration (stochastic peak
level)
300 m/s
2
Mechanical Data
Length 84 mm
Thread M18x1.5
Wrench size 22 mm
Tightening torque 40 to 60 Nm
Electrical Data
Power supply H+ nominal 9 V
Heater power steady state 10 W
Heater control frequency >2 Hz
Nominal resistance of Nernst cell 80
Max. current load for Nernst cell 10(DC)/250(AC) A
Characteristic
Signal output I
P
meas
Accuracy at lambda 0.8 0.80 0.01
Accuracy at lambda 1 1.016 0.007
I
P
[mA] lambda U
A
[V], v=17
-1.85 0.70 -
-1.08 0.80 0.364
-0.76 0.85 0.700
-0.47 0.90 1.005
0.00 1.009 1.500
0.34 1.18 1.858
0.68 1.43 2.216
0.95 1.70 2.500
1.40 2.42 2.973
2.55 Air 4.183
Please note: U
A
is not an output signal of the lambda sensor, but the
output of the evaluation circuit. Only I
P
correlates with the oxygen con-
tent of the exhaust gas.
Heater Strategy
T
Sensor
[C] -40 -10 20 50
U
H, eff, max
(t=0) [V] 8,5 9,5 10,5 10,5
Sensors | Lambda Sensors | 221

4
Connector Y 928 K00 050
Pin 1 IP/APE
Pin 2 UN/RE
Pin 3 VM/IPN
Pin 4 Uh-/H-
Pin 5 Uh+/H
Pin 6 IA/RT
Wire length L 60.0 cm
quest.
Installation Notes
This lambda sensor operates only in combination with a special LSU-
IC, used in most Bosch Motorsport ECUs and lambda control units like
LT4. Youll find this unit and more on our homepage at Accessories/
Expansion Modules.
The lambda sensor should be installed at point which permits the
measurement of a representative exhaust -gas mixture, which does
not exceed the maximum permissible temperature.
Install at a point where the gas is as hot as possible.
Observe the maximum permissible temperature.
As far as possible install the sensor vertically (wire upwards).
The sensor is not to be fitted near to the exhaust pipe outlet, so that
the influence of the outside air can be ruled out.
The exhaust-gas passage opposite the sensor must be free of leaks in
order to avoid the effects of leak -air.
Protect the sensor against condensation water.
The sensor is not to be painted, nor is wax to be applied or any other
forms of treatment. Use only the recommended grease for lubricating
the thread.
Please find further installation notes in the offer drawing at our home-
page.
222 | Sensors | Lambda Sensors

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Wide band
time < 1,030C
oxygen in exhaust gases of automotive engines (gasoline
or Diesel).
The wide band lambda sensor LSU 4.9 is a planar ZrO
2
Its monotonic output signal in the range of lambda 0.65
to air makes the LSU 4.9 capable of being used as a uni-
versal sensor for lambda 1 measurement as well as for
other lambda ranges. The connector module contains a
trimming resistor, which defines the characteristic of
the sensor.
The main benefit of the LSU 4.9 is the robust design
combined with the high Bosch production quality stand-
ard.
Modules.
Application
Fuel compatibility gasoline/Diesel/E85
Exhaust gas pressure < 4 bar
(operating)
< 930C
< 1,030C
Wire and protective sleeve tem-
perature
< 250C
level)
300 m/s
2
Variations
LSU 4.9 with automotive connector
Connector 1 928 404 682
Pin 1 IP / APE
Pin 2 VM / IPN
Pin 3 Uh- / H-
Pin 4 Uh+ / H
Pin 5 IA / RT
Pin 6 UN / RE
Wire length L 95.0 cm
LSU 4.9 with motorsports connector
Connector AS 6-07-35PN
Mating connector AS 0-07-35SN
Pin 1 Uh+ / H
Pin 2 Uh- / H-
Pin 3 IP / APE
Pin 4 VM / IPN
Pin 5 UN / RE
Pin 6 IA / RT
Mechanical Data
Length 84 mm
Thread M18x1.5
Wrench size 22 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply H+ nominal 7.5 V
System supply voltage 10.8 V to 16.5 V
Heater power steady state 7.5 W
Heater control frequency 100 Hz
Max current load for Nernst cell 250 A

4
Characteristic
Signal output I
P
meas
I
P
[mA] lambda U
A
[V], v=17 U
A
[V], v=8
-2.000 0.650 - 0.510
-1.602 0.700 - 0.707
-1.243 0.750 0.192 0.884
-0.927 0.800 0.525 1.041
-0.800 0.822 0.658 1.104
-0.652 0.850 0.814 1.177
-0.405 0.900 1.074 1.299
-0.183 0.950 1.307 1.409
-0.106 0.970 1.388 1.448
-0.040 0.990 1.458 1.480
0 1.003 1.500 1.500
0.015 1.010 1.515 1.507
0.097 1.050 1.602 1.548
0.193 1.100 1.703 1.596
0.250 1.132 1.763 1.624
0.329 1.179 1.846 1.663
0.671 1.429 2.206 1.832
0.938 1.701 2.487 1.964
1.150 1.990 2.710 2.069
1.385 2.434 2.958 2.186
1.700 3.413 3.289 2.342
2.000 5.391 3.605 2.490
2.150 7.506 3.762 2.565
2.250 10.119 3.868 2.614
Please note: U
A
P
tent of the exhaust gas. Amplification factor v=17 is typically used for
lean applications (lambda>1), amplification factor v=8 is typically
used for rich applications (lambda<1).
Heater Strategy
U
13 V
1.5 V
8.5 V
Connector Please see variations
Mating connector Please see variations
Sleeve fiber glass / silicone coated
Wire size AWG 24
Wire length Please see variations
quest.
Installation Notes
Expansion Modules.
measurement of a representative exhaust-gas mixture, which does not
exceed the maximum permissible temperature.
order to avoid the effects of leak-air.
the thread.
page.
With automotive connector, wire length 95 cm
With motorsports connector. Please specify the re-
quired wire length with your order.

4
Dimensions

4
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.9D
Features
u Lambda control for Diesel engines
u Wide band
time < 1,030C
oxygen in exhaust gases of automotive engines. Due to
its protective tube the LSU 4.9D is especially designed
for Diesel applications.
The wide band lambda sensor LSU 4.9D is a planar ZrO
2
Its monotonic output signal in the range of lambda =
0.65 to air makes the LSU capable of being used as a
universal sensor for lambda = 1 measurement as well as
for other lambda ranges. The connector module con-
tains a trimming resistor, which defines the characteris-
tic of the sensor.
The main benefit of the LSU is the robust design com-
bined with the high Bosch production quality standard.
Modules.
Application
Fuel compatibility Diesel
(operating)
< 930C
< 1,030C
perature
< 250C
level)
300 m/s
2
Mechanical Data
Length 84 mm
Thread M18x1.5
Wrench size 22 mm
Electrical Data
System supply voltage 10.8 V to 16.5 V
Max current load for Nernst cell 250 A
Characteristic
Signal output I
P
meas
Accuracy at lambda = 0.8 0.80 0.01
Accuracy at lambda = 1 1.016 0.007
Accuracy at lambda = 1.7 1.70 0.05
I
P
[mA] lambda U
A
[V], v=17 U
A
[V], v=8
-2.000 0.650 - 0.510
-1.602 0.700 - 0.707
-1.243 0.750 0.192 0.884
-0.927 0.800 0.525 1.041
-0.800 0.822 0.658 1.104
-0.652 0.850 0.814 1.177
-0.405 0.900 1.074 1.299
-0.183 0.950 1.307 1.409
-0.106 0.970 1.388 1.448
-0.040 0.990 1.458 1.480
0 1.003 1.500 1.500
0.015 1.010 1.515 1.507
0.097 1.050 1.602 1.548
0.193 1.100 1.703 1.596
0.250 1.132 1.763 1.624

4
0.329 1.179 1.846 1.663
0.671 1.429 2.206 1.832
0.938 1.701 2.487 1.964
1.150 1.990 2.710 2.069
1.385 2.434 2.958 2.186
1.700 3.413 3.289 2.342
2.000 5.391 3.605 2.490
2.150 7.506 3.762 2.565
2.250 10.119 3.868 2.614
Please note: U
A
P
Heater Strategy
T
Sensor
[C] -40 -10 20 50
U
H, eff, max
(t=0) [V] 8,5 9,5 10,5 10,5
U
13 V
1.5 V
8.5 V
Connector 1 928 404 687
Mating connector on request
Pin 1 IP / APE
Pin 2 VM / IPN
Pin 3 Uh- / H-
Pin 4 Uh+ / H
Pin 5 IA / RT
Pin 6 UN / RE
Sleeve fiber glas / silicone coated
quest.
Installation Notes
Expansion Modules.
The lambda sensor should be installed at a point which permits the
measurement of a representative exhaust-gas mixture, which does not
exceed the maximum permissible temperature.
order to avoid the effects of leak-air.
the thread.
page.
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.9D

4
Dimensions

4
Lambda Sensor Mini-LSU 4.9
Features
u Wide band
u Inconel sensor housing
time < 1,030C
oxygen in exhaust gases of automotive engines (gasoline
or Diesel).
The wide band lambda sensor Mini-LSU 4.9 is a planar
ZrO
2
dual cell limiting current sensor with integrated
heater. Its monotonic output signal in the range of lamb-
da = 0.65 to air makes the LSU capable of being used as
a universal sensor for lambda = 1 measurement as well
as for lean and rich ranges.
The connector housing contains a trimming resistor,
which defines the characteristic of the sensor. The main
benefit of the Mini-LSU 4.9 is its very compact design in
combination with the high Bosch production quality
standard. The Mini-LSU is produced and tested in a
handmade process.
The complete light weight housing is made of Inconel
which makes it resistant against high temperatures. The
sensor element is more than 50 % smaller than it is in
the production lambda sensor. It is connected over sil-
ver coated steel cables to make it more reliable against
vibrations.
Modules.
Application
Fuel compatibility gasoline/Diesel/E85
(operating)
< 930C
< 1,030C
Hexagon temperature 700C
perature
< 250C
level)
300 m/s
2
(see Installation
Notes)
Mechanical Data
Length 60 mm
Thread M16x1.5
Wrench size 17 mm
Electrical Data
System supply voltage H+ (min) 10.8 V
Max. current load for Nernst cell 250 A
Characteristic
Signal output I
P
meas
I
P
[mA] lambda U
A
[V], v=17 U
A
[V], v=8
-2.000 0.650 - 0.510
-1.602 0.700 - 0.707
-1.243 0.750 0.192 0.884
-0.927 0.800 0.525 1.041
-0.800 0.822 0.658 1.104
-0.652 0.850 0.814 1.177
-0.405 0.900 1.074 1.299
-0.183 0.950 1.307 1.409
-0.106 0.970 1.388 1.448
-0.040 0.990 1.458 1.480
0 1.003 1.500 1.500
0.015 1.010 1.515 1.507

4
0.097 1.050 1.602 1.548
0.193 1.100 1.703 1.596
0.250 1.132 1.763 1.624
0.329 1.179 1.846 1.663
0.671 1.429 2.206 1.832
0.938 1.701 2.487 1.964
1.150 1.990 2.710 2.069
1.385 2.434 2.958 2.186
1.700 3.413 3.289 2.342
2.000 5.391 3.605 2.490
2.150 7.506 3.762 2.565
2.250 10.119 3.868 2.614
Please note: U
A
P
Heater Strategy
U
11.62 V
13 V
1.5 V
=0.15 V/s
7.53 V
Resistance/LSU Temperature
R (Ohm) Temp (C)
80 1030
150 888
200 840
250 806
300 780
350 761
400 744
450 729
550 703
650 686
800 665
1000 642
1200 628
2500 567
Connector 1 928 404 682
Connector loom on request
Pin 1 IP/APE
Pin 2 VM/IPN
Pin 3 Uh-/M-
Pin 4 Uh+/M+
Pin 5 IA/RT
Pin 6 UN/RE
Sleeve fiber glass / silicone coated
Wire size AWG 22
quest.
Installation Notes
Expansion Modules.
measurement of a representative exhaust-gas mixture and which does
not exceed the maximum permissible temperature.
Sensors should be installed as close to vertical as possible (wire up-
wards).
The exhaust system up stand and surrounding the sensor must be
sealed in order to avoid the effects of leakage air.
Protect the sensor against condensation water. The sensor is not to be
painted, nor is wax to be applied or any other forms of treatment. Use
only the recommended grease for lubricating the thread.
page.
A higher maximum vibration profile is possible and should be deter-
mined by the customers individual application.
Lambda Sensor Mini-LSU 4.9

4
Dimensions

4
Linear Potentiometer LP 10
Features
u Measurement range 0 to 10 mm
u Low power consumption
u Compact design
The LP 10 is a short length linear potentiometer which
is designed to measure the relative position of two
points, e.g. the stabilizer movement.
Its operating mode is based on the linear tape potenti-
ometer principle where the distance travelled between
the moving end to the wiper is proportional to the re-
sistance between them.
The advantage of this LP is its precise and compact de-
sign with a hard metal housing and low power consump-
tion.
Application
Application 0 to 10 mm
Mechanical Data
Min. length 50 mm
Mounting 2 x M3
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Nominal resistance 1 k
Resistance tolerance 20 %
Non-linearity 1 %
Max. current 1 mA
Connector KPSE 6E8-33P-DN
Connector loom
KPSE 0E8-33S-DN
F 02U 000 115-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Various motorsports and automotive connectors on request.
Please specify the requested wire length with your order.
Installation Notes
The LP 10 can be connected directly to most electronic control units
and data logging systems.
Optional mounting modifications are available.
Each mounting orientation is possible.
Comes with a spring return shaft.
page.
Sensors | Linear Potentiometers | 233

4
Dimensions
234 | Sensors | Linear Potentiometers

4
Features
u Aluminum housing
The LP 25 is a linear potentiometer which is designed to
measure the relative position of two points, e.g. the
gear position, throttle position or suspension move-
ment.
sign with an anodized aluminum cylindrical housing and
low power consumption.
Application
Mechanical Data
Min. length 147 mm
Mounting 2 x M5
Protection IP65
Max. shaft velocity 1 m/sec
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Non-linearity 0.25 %
Connector ASL 6-06-05SA-HE
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05PA-HE
F 02U 000 232-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
Optional mounting modifications are available.
Comes with a spring return shaft.
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Linear Potentiometer
LP 25 twin
Features
u Double output
u Aluminum housing
The LP 25 twin is a linear potentiometer which is de-
signed to measure the relative position of two points,
e.g. the gear position, throttle position or suspension
movement and for use in electronic throttle control sys-
tems.
the moving ends to the wiper is proportional to the re-
sign with an anodized aluminum cylindrical housing, low
power consumption and infinite resolution.
Application
Mechanical Data
Min. length 95 mm
Mounting 3 mm
Protection IP66
Max. shaft velocity < 10 m/sec
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Connector loom
AS 0-07-35SN
F 02U 000 238-01
Pin 1 U
S
1
Pin 2 Gnd 1
Pin 3 Sig 1
Pin 4 U
S
2
Pin 5 Gnd 2
Pin 6 Sig 2
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The LP 25 twin can be connected directly to most electronic control
units and data logging systems.
Application where redundant signals are necessary to ensure system
runs failsafe.
page.
Linear Potentiometer LP 25 twin

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Measurement range: 0 to 50 mm
u Aluminum housing
ment.
The operating mode of this sensor is based on the linear
tape potentiometer principle where the distance travel-
led between the moving end to the wiper is proportional
to the resistance between them.
Application
2
at 10 to 500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Min. length 172 mm
Mounting 2 x M5
Protection IP64
Max. shaft velocity 1.5 m/sec
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Nominal resistance 4.7 k
Max. current 1 mA
Connector KPSE 6E8-33P-DN
Mating connector
KPSE 0E8-33S-DN
F 02U 000 115-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The LP 50 can be connected directly to the most electronic control
Ball joints at shaft end and case.
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Linear Potentiometer
LP 50 twin
Features
u Double output
u Aluminum housing
The LP 50 twin is a linear potentiometer which is de-
signed to measure the relative position of two points,
e.g. the gear position, throttle position or suspension
movement and for use in electronic throttle control sys-
tems.
It works base on the linear tape potentiometer principle
where the distance traveled between the moving end to
the wiper is proportional to the resistance between
them.
Application
Mechanical Data
Min. length 120 mm
Mounting 3 mm
Protection IP66
Max. shaft velocity < 10 m/sec
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Power supply max. < 45 V
Connector loom
AS 0-07-35SN
F 02U 000 238-01
Pin 1 U
S
1
Pin 2 Gnd 1
Pin 3 Sig 1
Pin 4 U
S
2
Pin 5 Gnd 2
Pin 6 Sig 2
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The LP 50 twin can be connected directly to most electronic control
Application where redundant signals are necessary to ensure system
runs failsafe.
page.
Linear Potentiometer LP 50 twin

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Aluminum housing
ment.
sign with hard metal housing and low power consump-
tion.
Application
Temperature range 40 to 85C
2
at 10 to 12 kHz
Mechanical Data
Min. length 223.6 mm
Mounting 2 x M5
Protection IP66
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Linear Potentiometer LP 75F
Features
u Aluminum housing
The LP 75F is a linear potentiometer which is designed
to measure the relative position of two points, e.g. the
ment.
The operating mode of this sensor is based on the linear
tape potentiometer principle where the distance travel-
led between the moving end to the wiper is proportional
to the resistance between them.
The advantage of this LP is its compact and lightweight
design together with its wider operating temperature
range
Application
2
at 10 to 12 kHz
Mechanical Data
Min. length 223.6 mm
Mounting 2 x M5
Protection IP66
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Connector KPSE 6E8-33P-DN-A34
Mating connector
KPSE 0E8-33S-DN
F 02U 000 115-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The LP 75F can be connected directly to most electronic control units
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Aluminum housing
The LP 100 is a linear potentiometer which is designed
ment.
Application
2
at 10 to 12kHz
Mechanical Data
Min. length [L1] 227 mm
Mounting 2 x M5
Protection IP66
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Power supply 5 V
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The LP 100 can be connected directly with most electronic control
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Aluminum housing
The LP 100F is a linear potentiometer which is designed
ment.
The advantage of this LP is its compact and lightweight
design together with its wider operating temperature
range.
Application
2
at 10 to 12 kHz
Mechanical Data
Min. length [L1] 220 mm
Mounting 2 x M5
Protection IP65
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Connector KPSE 6E8-33P-DN-A34
Connector loom
KPSE 0E8-33S-DN
F 02U 000 115-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The LP 100F can be connected directly to most electronic control
page.
The LP 100F can be connected directly to most electronic control

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Aluminum housing
The LP 150 is a linear potentiometer which is designed
ment.
power consumption and infinite resolution
Application
Mechanical Data
Min. length 282 mm
Mounting 2 x M5
Protection IP65
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Air PSA-B
Features
u Absolute air pressure measurements
u Measurement range 0.1 to 1.15 bar or 0.2 to 2.5
bar
u Analog output
This sensor is designed to measure absolute air pres-
sure, especially the air box pressure of gasoline or Die-
sel engines.
An integrated circuit combines a piezo-resistive sensor
element and electronic systems for signal-amplification
and temperature-compensation. The output of the sen-
sor is an analog, ratio metric signal.
Two different pressure ranges are available (0.1 to 1.15
bar or 0.2 to 2.5 bar).
nation of both high quality production part and motor-
sport connector.
Application
Application Please see variations
Pressure reference type absolute
Max. pressure 5 bar
Operating temp. range -40 to 130C
Media temp. range -40 to 130C
Storage temp. range -40 to 130C
2
at 200 Hz, 125 m/s
2
at
440 Hz, sine
Variations
PSA-B (0.1 to 1.15
bar)
PSA-B (0.2 to 2.50
bar)
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V
0.016 bar 0.034 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1.4 % 1.36 %
Sensitivity 4,048 mV/bar 1,848 mV/bar
Offset -4.8 mV 30.4 mV
Mechanical Data
Mounting M6
Fitting 12.05 mm
Sealing O-ring 7.59 x 2.62 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max. power supply 16 V
Full scale output U
A
at 5 V 0.3 to 4.8 V
Current I
S
9 mA
Characteristic
Response time T10/90 1 ms
Compensated range 10 to 85C
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V Please see variations
Tolerance (FS) Please see variations
Sensitivity Please see variations
Offset Please see variations
Tolerance 0.1 to 1.15 bar
Sensors | Pressure Sensors Air | 253

4
Expansion of Tolerance
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 U
S
Pin 5 -
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The PSA-B is designed for engines using ROZ95, ROZ98, M15, E22
and Diesel.
The sensor can be connected directly to most control units.
To avoid noise, an ECU-input circuit with a RC-low pass filter (tau = 2
ms) is recommended.
Use engine oil (5W40) as O-Ring grease (no silicone based grease).
Avoid miss-pinning (max. 5 minutes at I = 0.3 A).
Please find further application hints in the offer drawing and
free download of the sensor configuration file (*.sdf) for the Bosch Da-
ta Logging System at our homepage.
PSA-B
0.1 to 1.15 bar
PSA-B
0.2 to 2.5 bar
Adapter for PSA-B
254 | Sensors | Pressure Sensors Air

4
Dimensions
4
0
.
2
1
4
.
7
2
6
1
2
.
711. 85
4
5
4
.
4
2
3
41
53. 4
20
6
.
6
0
.
3
L
ASL 6-06-05PC-HE

4
Pressure Sensor Air PSA-C
Features
u Measurement range 0.2 to 1.05 bar or 0.2 to 2.5
bar
u Analog output
u External tube connector
sel engines.
element and electronics for signal-amplification and
temperature-compensation. Air pressure is supplied to
the sensor via a tube connector. The output of the sen-
sor is an analog, ratio metric signal.
nation of the high quality of the production part and a
low price.
Application
Application Please see Ordering information
Max. pressure 5 bar
2
at 10 to 1,000 Hz
Variations
PSA-C (0.2 to 1.05
bar)
PSA-C (0.2 to 2.50
bar)
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V
0.014 bar 0.034 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1.33 % 1.36 %
Sensitivity 5,000 mV/bar 1,848 mV/bar
Offset -600 mV 30 mV
Mechanical Data
Mounting M6
Fitting 6 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max power supply U
S
max. 16 V
Full scale output U
A
at 5 V 0.3 to 4.8 V
Current I
S
9 mA
Characteristic
Tolerance (FS) at U
S

4
Mating connector
3-pole Jetronic
D 261 205 289-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Installation Notes
The PSA-C is designed for engines using ROZ95, ROZ98, M15, E22
and Diesel.
Avoid liquid entering the measuring cell.
ms) is recommended.
PSA-C
0.2 to 1.05 bar
PSA-C
0.2 to 2.50 bar

4
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Air PSB-2
Features
u Measurement range 0.1 to 2.0 bar
u Analog output
This sensor is designed for precise measurements of ab-
solute air pressure, especially the air box and boost
pressure of gasoline or Diesel engines.
element and electronics for signal-amplification and
temperature-compensation. The output of the sensor is
an analog, ratio metric signal.
nation of the high quality of the production part and an
individual calibration. Each sensor is delivered with a
calibration sheet to enable very small measurement tol-
erances.
Application
Application 0.1 to 2.0 bar (a)
Max. pressure 5 bar
2
at 200 Hz, 125 m/s
2
at
440 Hz, sine
Mechanical Data
Mounting M6
Fitting 12,05 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max power supply U
S
max. 16 V
Full scale output U
A
at 5 V 0.3 to 4.8 V
Current I
S
9 mA
Characteristic
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.028 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1.4 %
Sensitivity 2,236 mV/bar
(an individual calibration sheet
will be delivered)
Offset 176 mV
will be delivered)
Tolerance

4
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 U
S
Pin 5 -
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire Size AWG 24
Wire Length L 15 to 100 cm
quest.
Installation Notes
The PSB-2 is designed for engines using ROZ95, ROZ98, M15, E22
and Diesel.
To avoid noise, an ECU-input circuit with a RC-lowpass filter (tau = 2
ms) is recommended.
To optimise the accuracy of this sensor, an individual calibration data
sheet is delivered with each sensor.

4
Dimensions
7
.
5
1
4
.
7
2
6
1
2
.
711. 85
4
5
4
.
4
2
3
7. 4
41
53. 4
ASL 6-06-05PC-HE
L

4
Features
u Analog output
u Very short response time
sure, especially the air box and boost pressure of gaso-
line or Diesel engines over a wide range.
element, electronics for signal-amplification and temper-
ature-compensation. The output of the sensor is an ana-
log, ratio metric signal.
nation of the high quality of the production part and an
individual calibration. Each sensor is delivered with a
calibration sheet to enable very small measurement tol-
erances. Furthermore the sensor has a very short re-
sponse time.
Application
Application 0.5 to 4 bar (a)
Max. pressure 6 bar
2
at 10 to 1,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Mounting M6
Fitting 12.05 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.5 to 5.5 V
Max power supply U
S
max. 16 V
Full scale output U
A
at 5 V 0.3 to 4.8 V
Current I
S
9 mA
Characteristic
Response time T10/90 0.2 ms
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.056 bar
will be delivered)
Offset -71 mV
will be delivered)
Tolerance
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 U
S

4
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The PSB-4 is designed for engines using ROZ95, ROZ98, M15, E22
and Diesel.
Please note that the 6mm tube connector has no function.
To optimize the accuracy of this sensor, an individual calibration sheet
is delivered with each sensor.
Please find further application hints in the offer drawing. www.bosch-
motorsport.com
Free download of the sensor configuration file (*.sdf) for the Bosch
Data Logging System www.bosch-motorsport.com
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Air PSP
Features
u Analog output
This sensor is designed to measure absolute air-pres-
sel engines.
element and an electronic for signal-amplification and
temperature compensation. The output of the sensor is
an analog, ratio metric signal.
nation of both high quality production part and motor-
sport connector.
Application
Max. pressure 5 bar
Max. vibration 0.19 mm at 100 to 200 Hz
250 m/s
2
at 200 to 500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Mounting M6
Fitting 12.05 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.5 to 5.5 V
Max power supply U
S
max 16 V
Full scale output U
A
at 5 V 0.3 to 4.8 V
Current I
S
9 mA
Characteristic
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.042 bar
Offset 96 mV
Tolerance
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Gnd

4
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 U
S
Pin 5 -
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The PSP is designed for engines using ROZ95, ROZ98, M15, E22 and
Diesel.
ms) is recommended.
Pressure Sensor Air PSP
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Air PST
Features
u Absolute air pressure and temperature measure-
ments
u Analog output
sure and air temperature, especially the air box pressure
of gasoline or Diesel engines.
element, electronics for signal-amplification and temper-
ature-compensation. The output of the sensor is an ana-
log, ratio metric signal. An NTC resistance is used for
temperature measurements.
The main feature of this sensor is the integration of two
functions (air pressure and air temperature) in one
housing. A further benefit of the PST is the high quality
of the series part at a low price.
Application
Application 1 0.1 to 1.15 bar (a)
Application 2 -40 to 125C
Max. pressure 5 bar
Max. vibration 0.19 mm at 100 to 200 Hz
250 m/s
2
at 200 to 500 Hz
sine
Mechanical Data
Mounting M6
Fitting 18 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.5 to 5.5 V
Max power supply U
S
max. 16 V
Full scale output U
A
at 5 V 0.3 to 4.8 V
Current I
S
9 mA
Characteristic Application 1
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.016 bar
Offset -4.76 mV
Tolerance
Characteristic Application 2
T [C] R [Ohm]
-40 45,313
-30 26,114
-20 15,462
-10 9,397

4
0 5,896
10 3,792
20 2,500
25 2,057
30 1,707
40 1,175
50 834
60 596
70 436
80 323
90 243
100 187
110 144
120 113
130 89
Resistance at 20C 2.5 kOhm
Tolerance 5 %
Response time tau
63
45 s at air ; v = 6 m/s
Mating connector
4-pole Compact
D 261 205 336-01
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 NTC
Pin 3 U
S
Pin 4 Pressure Sig
Pin 5 -
Installation Notes
The PST is designed for engines using ROZ95, ROZ98, M15, E22 and
Diesel.
ms) is recommended.
For the temperature measurement, a 1 kOhm pull-up at 5 V is recom-
mended.
Pressure Sensor Air PST

4
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSC-10
Features
u Absolute fluid pressure measurements
u Measurement range 0 to 10 bar
u Analog output
This sensor is designed to measure absolute pressure of
various kinds of media e.g. Diesel, gasoline, water, en-
gine oil, transmission oil or air. The sensor is available
for two different supply voltage ranges.
The sensor uses stainless steel measuring cells with pie-
zo-resistive measuring bridges in thin layer technique,
which are hermetically welded together with stainless
steel pressure ports. This guarantees a complete media
compatibility.
The main benefit of this sensor is the high quality of a
production part at a low price.
Application
Application 0 to 10 bar (a)
Max. pressure 20 bar
Bio fuel compatibility E 85 / M 100
2
rms at 10 to 2,000 Hz
Variations
PSC-10 (5 V) PSC-10 (12 V)
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V 9 to 30 V
Full scale output U
A
10 to 90 % U
S
ratio-
metric
0.5 to 4.5 V non-ra-
tiometric
Response time
T10/90
1.5 ms 1.0 ms
Sensitivity 400 mV/bar at U
S
=
5 V
400 mV/bar
Offset 100 mV at U
S
= 5 V 100 mV
Pin 1 - U
S
Pin 2 Gnd Gnd
Pin 3 Sig Sig
Pin 4 U
S
-
Pin 5 - -
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10x1
Wrench size 17 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
Please see variations
Max power supply U
S
max 30 V
Full scale output U
A
Current I
S
8 mA
Characteristic
Response time T10/90 Please see variations
Tolerance (FS) at US = 5 V 0.1 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1 %
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Sensors | Pressure Sensors Fluid | 269

4
Installation Notes
The PSC-10 can be connected directly to most control units.
The sensor has a protection for over voltage, reverse polarity and
short-circuit.
Please do not fix the sensor directly to the engine block to avoid unde-
sired strong vibrations.
The sensor meets all EMV, EMC and ESD automotive standards.
Please find further application hints in the offer drawing and free
download of the sensor configuration file (*.sdf) for the Bosch Data
Logging System at our homepage.
PSC-10
4.75 to 5.25 V
PSC-10
9 to 30 V
Dimensions
9.5 11
12 12
M
1
0
x
1
270 | Sensors | Pressure Sensors Fluid

4
Features
u Absolute fluid pressure measurement
u 0 to 260 bar
u For gasoline, Diesel, oil or brake fluid
u Robust and compact design
u High robustness against vibrations
The PSC-260 is specially designed to measure absolute
pressure in gasoline direct injection applications. This
sensor is also compatible with other kind of fluids e.g.
Diesel, engine oil, transmission oil or brake fluid.
The sensor uses a thin layer technique to achieve high
accuracy pressure measurements. The stainless steel
measuring cells with piezoresistive bridges are hermeti-
cally welded with stainless steel pressure ports. The in-
ternal reference ensures ambient pressure independent
measurements.
The main benefits of this sensor are its high accuracy,
its wide measurement range and its robust and compact
design.
Application
Operating temp. range -40 to 130C (140C)
Media temp. range -40 to 130C (140C)
2
at 800 to 900 Hz
350 m/s
2
at 1.000 to 2.500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10 x 1
Wrench size 27 mm
Installation torque 22 Nm in steel
32.5 Nm in aluminum
Weight w/o wire 35,2 g
Sealing sealed cone
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max power supply U
S
max 16 V
Full scale output U
A
10 to 90 % U
S
ratio metric
Current I
S
12 mA
Characteristic
Load capacity 10 nF
Output resistance 10
Tolerance (FS) + 1 % (0 to 100C)
+ 1.5 % (-40 to 0C and 100 to
130C)
S
= 5 V
Offset 500 mV at U
S
= 5 V
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 U
S
Pin 5 -
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The PSC-260 can be connected directly to most control units. Please
consider the TCI for the electrical connection of the sensor.
The sensor has a protection for overvoltage, reverse polarity and
short-circuit.
Please consider using the adapter F 02U 002 711-01.

4
Accessories
Adapter
Order number F 02U 002 711-01
Dimensions
Sensor
Adapter

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSM
Features
u Pressure measurement range 0 to 12 bar or 0 to
250 bar
u Compact design
u Analog output
The sensor utilises a flush metal diaphragm as a force
collector. The force is transferred to a solid state piezo-
resistive sensing element via a thin intervening film of
noncompressible silicone oil. The housing is welded her-
metically.
An individual calibration sheet will be delivered with
each sensor.
The main feature and benefit of this sensor is a good
protection against vibrations.
Application
Application Please see Variations
Max. pressure Please see Variations
2
max at 5 to 5,000
Hz (sine)
Variations
0 to 12 0 to 250
Measuring range 0 to 12 bar 0 to 250 bar
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.12 bar 2.5 bar
Max. pressure 24 bar 500 bar
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10x1
Wrench size 16 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
8 to 16 V
Full scale output U
A
4.9 V 1.5 %
Current I
S
25 mA
Characteristic
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V Please see Variations
Tolerance (FS) 1 %
Sensitivity/Offset (an individual calibration sheet
will be delivered)
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 Scr
Sleeve Viton
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
The PSM can be connected directly to most control units.

4
100 % relative humidity is possible.
page.
PSM
0 to 12 bar
PSM
0 to 250 bar
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSM-S
Features
u Pressure measurement range 0 to 12 bar or 0 to
70 bar
u Compact design
u Analog output
The sensor utilizes a flush metal diaphragm as a force
collector. The force is transferred to a solid state piezo-
resistive sensing element via a thin intervening film of
noncompressible silicone oil. The housing is welded her-
metically.
An individual calibration sheet will be delivered with
each sensor.
The main feature and benefit of this sensor is a good
protection against vibrations.
Application
Application 0 to 12 bar or 0 to 70 bar (a)
Max. pressure Please see variations
Bio fuel compatibility E85/M100
2
max at 5 to 10,000
Hz (sine)
Variations
PSM-S (12
bar)
PSM-S (70
bar)
Measuring range 0 to 12 bar 0 to 70 bar
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.24 bar 0.7 bar
Tolerance (FS) 2 % 1 %
Max. pressure 36 bar 210 bar
Mechanical Data
Male thread M8x1
Wrench size 13 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
8 to 16 V
Full scale output U
A
4.7 V 1.5 %
Characteristic
Compensated range 0 to 125 C
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
Sensitivity/Offset (an individual calibration sheet
will be delivered)
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 Scr
Sleeve Viton
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
The PSM-S can be connected directly to most control units.

4
100 % relative humidity is possible.
page.
PSM-S
0 to 12 bar, 36 bar, 0.24 bar, 2%
PSM-S
0 to 70 bar, 210 bar, 0.7 bar, 1%
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-10
Features
u Analog output
gine oil, transmission oil or air.
zo-resistive measuring bridges in thin layer technique.
These are hermetically welded together with stainless
compatibility.
production part at a low price. The sensor is available
Application
2
Variations
PSS-10 (5 V) PSS-10 (12 V)
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V 8 to 30 V
Full scale output U
A
10 to 90% U
S
ratio-
metric
tiometric
Response time
T10/90
1.5 ms 1.0 ms
S
=5
V
400 mV/bar
Offset 100 mV at U
S
=5 V 100 mV
Mating connector 3-pole Compact
D 261 205 339-1
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 334-01
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10x1
Wrench size 17 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
Max power supply U
S
max 30 V
Full scale output U
A
Current I
S
8 mA
Characteristic
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.1 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1 %
Sensitivity Please variations
Offset Please variations
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 U
S
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Installation Notes
The PSS-10 can be connected directly to most control units.
short-circuit.

4
PSS-10
4.75 to 5.25 V
PSS-10
8 to 30 V
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-10R
Features
u Relative fluid pressure measurements
u Analog output
This sensor is designed to measure the pressure of me-
dia in relation to the ambient pressure (e.g. Diesel, gas-
oline, water, engine oil, transmission oil, air). The sensor
is available for two different supply voltage ranges.
compatibility.
Application
Application 0 to 10 bar (r)
Pressure reference type relative
Operating temp. range Please see variations
Media temp. range Please see variations
2
Variations
PSS-10 (5 V) PSS-10 (12 V)
Operating temp.
range
-40 to 125C
(140C)
-40 to 125C
(140C)
-40 to 125C
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V 8 to 30 V
Full scale output U
A
10 to 90% U
S
ratio-
metric
tiometric
Response time
T10/90
1.5 ms 1.0 ms
S
=5
V
400 mV/bar
Offset 500 mV at U
S
=5 V 500 mV
D 261 205 339-01
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 334-01
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10x1
Wrench size 17 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
Max power supply U
S
max 30 V
Full scale output U
A
Current I
S
8 mA
Characteristic
Compensated range 0 to 90 C
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 0.1 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1 %
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 U
S
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -

4
Installation Notes
The PSS-10R can be connected directly to most control units.
short-circuit.
PSS-10R
4.75 to 5.25 V
PSS-10R
8 to 30 V
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid
PSS-100R
Features
u Analog output
oline, water, engine oil, transmission oil or air). The sen-
sor is available for two different supply voltage ranges.
compatibility.
The main feature of this sensor is the high quality of a
Application
2
Variations
PSS-100R (5 V) PSS-100R (12 V)
Operating temp.
range
-40 to 125C
(140C)
-40 to 125C
(140C)
-40 to 125C
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V 8 to 30 V
Full scale output U
A
10 to 90 % U
S
ratio-
metric
tiometric
Response time
T10/90
1.5 ms 1.0 ms
S
= 5
V
40 mV/bar
Offset 500 mV at U
S
= 5 V 500 mV
D 261 205 339-01
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 339-01
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10x1
Wrench size 17 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
Max power supply 30 V
Full scale output U
A
Current I
S
8 mA
Characteristic
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
= 5 V 1 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1 %
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 U
S

4
Installation Notes
short-circuit.
PSS-100R
4.75 to 5.25 V
PSS-100R
8 to 30 V
Dimensions

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid
PSS-250R
Features
u Analog output
oline, water, engine oil, transmission oil or air). The sen-
sor is available for two different supply voltage ranges.
compatibility.
production part at a low price
Application
2
Variations
PSS-250R (5 V) PSS-250R (12 V)
Operating temp.
range
-40 to 125C
(140C)
-40 to 125C
(140C)
-40 to 125C
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V 8 to 30 V
Full scale output U
A
10 to 90 % U
S
ratio-
metric
tiometric
Response time
T10/90
1.5 ms 1.0 ms
S
= 5
V
16 mV/bar
Offset 500 mV at U
S
= 5 V 500 mV
D 261 205 339-01
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 334-01
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10x1
Wrench size 17 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
Max power supply U
S
max 30 V
Full scale output U
A
Current I
S
8 mA
Characteristic
Tolerance (FS) 2.5 bar
Tolerance (FS) 1 %
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 U
S
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -

4
Installation Notes
short-circuit.
PSS-250R
4.75 to 5.25 V
PSS-250R
8 to 30 V
Dimensions

4
Features
u Absolute fluid pressure measurement
u 0 to 260 bar
u For gasoline, Diesel, oil or brake fluid
u Robust and compact design
The PSS-260 is specially designed to measure absolute
pressure in gasoline direct injection applications. This
sensor is also compatible with other kind of fluids e.g.
Diesel, engine oil, transmission oil or brake fluid.
The sensor uses a thin layer technique to achieve high
accuracy pressure measurements. The stainless steel
measuring cells with piezoresistive bridges are hermeti-
cally welded with stainless steel pressure ports. The in-
ternal reference ensures ambient pressure independent
measurements.
The main benefits of this sensor are its high accuracy,
its wide measurement range and its robust and compact
design.
Application
2
RMS at 800 to 2,500
Hz
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10 x 1
Wrench size 27 mm
Installation torque 22 Nm in steel
32.5 Nm in aluminum
Sealing sealed cone
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max power supply U
S
max 16 V
Full scale output U
A
10 to 90 % U
S
ratiometric
Current I
S
12 mA
Characteristic
Load capacity 10 nF
Output resistance 10
Tolerance (FS) + 1 % (0 to 100C)
+ 1.5 % (-40 to 0C and 100 to
130C)
S
= 5 V
Offset 500 mV at U
S
= 5 V
D 261 205 366-01
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 U
S
Installation Notes
The PSS-260 can be connected directly to most control units. Please
consider the TCI for the electrical connection of the sensor.
short-circuit.
Please consider using the adapter F 02U 002 711-01.
Accessories
Adapter

4
Dimensions
Sensor
Adapter

4
Pressure Sensor Fluid PST-F
Features
u Absolute fluid pressure and temperature measure-
ments
u Pressure measurement range 0.5 to 6.0 bar
u Temperature measurement range -40 to 125C
u Analog output
This sensor is designed to measure absolute pressure
and temperature of various kinds of fluids e.g. Diesel,
gasoline, oil or transmission oil.
The PST-F is equipped with a piezo-resistive pressure
sensor element integrated in a silicon chip together with
signal processing electronics. The active surface of this
chip is exposed to a reference vacuum. The temperature
sensor element is an NTC-resistor.
The main feature of this sensor is the integration of two
functions (fluid pressure and fluid temperature) in one
housing.
Application
Application 1 0.5 to 6 bar (a)
Reference absolute
Biofuel compatibility E22, M15
2
at 1 to 250 Hz
60 m/s
2
at 250 to 2,600 Hz
40 m/s
2
at 2,600 to 3,200 Hz
Mechanical Data
Male thread M6
Weight without wire 30 g
Wrench size 10 mm
Installation torque 11.5 Nm
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max power supply U
S
max 16 V
Full scale output U
A
0.5 to 4.5 V
Current I
S
9 mA
Characteristic 1
Output load 10 k
Sensitivity 727 mV/bar
Offset 136 mV
Characteristic 2
T [C] R []
-40 45,303
-30 26,108
-20 15,458
-10 9,395
0 5,671
10 3,791
20 2,499
30 1,706
40 1,174
50 834
60 595
70 436
80 322
90 243
100 187
110 144
120 113
125 100
Response Time tau 63 45 s in air; v = 6 m/s

4
Tolerance
Mating connector
4-pole Compact
D 261 205 336-01
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 NTC
Pin 3 U
S
Pin 4 Pressure Sig
Installation Notes
To avoid noise, an ECU-input circuit with a RC-low pass filter is recom-
mended.
(R = 21 k, C = 100 nF)
For the temperature measurement, a 1 k pull-up at 5 V is recommen-
ded.
Pressure Sensor Fluid PST-F

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Absolute fluid pressure and temperature measure-
ments
u Pressure measurement range 0 to 280 bar
u Temperature measurement range -40 to 140C
This sensor is designed to measure absolute gasoline
pressure and gasoline temperature in direct injection
systems.
The pressure measurement is based on the expansion of
a steel diaphragm, where strain gauges are placed to a
Wheatstone bridge. The measured signal is proportional
to the pressure and is processed in an application spe-
cific integrated circuit.
The temperature measurement is conducted by an NTC
thermistor. The main feature of this sensor is its com-
pact design and the integration of two functions (tem-
perature and pressure measurements) in a common
housing.
Application
Application 1 0 to 280 bar (a)
Reference Absolute
Biofuel compatibility E26
2
at 147 to 1,350 Hz
175 m/s
2
at 1,350 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Male thread M10x1
Weight without wire 36 g
Wrench size 27 mm
Sealing Sealed cone
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
4.75 to 5.25 V
Max power supply U
S
max 16 V
Full scale output U
A
0.5 to 4.5 V U
S
ratiometric
Current I
S
12 mA
Characteristic 1
Response time T10/90 Pressure: 0.2 to 0.8 ms
Temperature: 9 s (response time
of temperature signal in oil dip
bath 20 to 100C)
Compensated range -40 to 130C
Tolerance (FS) at U
S
+/- 1 % at 0 to 100C
+/- 1.5 % at -40 to 0C and 100
to 130C
Sensitivity 14.3 mV/bar at U
S
= 5 V
Offset 500 mV at U
S
= 5 V
Characteristic 2
T [C] R []
-40 243,241
-30 135,753
-20 78,716
-10 47,258
0 29,287
10 18,684
20 12,240
30 8,218
40 5,642
50 3,955
60 2,826
70 2,055
80 1,519
90 1,141
100 868.4
110 669.9
120 523.2
130 413.3
140 330.0

4
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 NTC
Pin 4 U
S
Installation Notes
For temperature measurement please use a pull-up resistor with an
optimal value of 4.6 kOhm.
Please note that using the adapter F 02U 002 956-01 in connection
with the PST-F 2 the ambient conditions could be changed (e.g. medi-
um temperature dissipation or undesired vibrations).
short-circuit.
Accessories
Pressure Sensor Fluid PST-F 2 Adapter
Order number F02U 002 956-01

4
Dimensions
Sensor
Adapter

4
Rotary Potentiometer Mini-
RP 100-M
Features
u Rotational movement measurement
u Measurement range: 0 to 100
u Compact design
u Robust housing
This sensor is designed to measure rotational move-
ment, e.g. throttle angle or spring travel.
A throttle rotation moves an internal slider (wiper) on a
resistive element which is supplied with voltage. Thus
voltage proportional to the angle can be measured. The
housing and the bearings are made of high temperature
resistant plastic. The mounting plate is protected with a
metal cover to ensure a good fixation. The sensor is fit-
ted in a shrink down boot for additional protection.
The main benefit of this sensor is the combination of
high accuracy, motorsports spec connection and a very
small and robust aluminum housing.
Application
Application 0 to 100
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Protection class IP65
Mounting 2 x M4
Lifetime 50 x 10
6
rotations
Housing Aluminum alloy
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V
Max. power supply <15 V
Total resistance 1.5 k 20%
Current Is 1 A
Max. allowable contact current 1 mA
Characteristic
Max. rotation speed 120 min-1
Temp. coefficient 5 ppm/K
Direction of rotation Anti-clockwise
Both rotation directions are available on request.
Connector loom ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
Pin 1 (A) U
S
Pin 2 (B) Gnd
Pin 3 (C) Sig
Pin 4 (D) -
Pin 5 (E) -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
The products of the RP series can be connected directly to most con-
trol units.
The sensor has no internal mechanical stops.
Both rotation directions and other rotation angles available on re-
quest.
Rotary Potentiometer Mini-RP 100-M
Sensors | Rotary Potentiometers | 293

4
Dimensions
294 | Sensors | Rotary Potentiometers

4
Rotary Potentiometer RP 50-
M/130-M/350-M
Features
u Measurement range: 0 to 50, 0 to 130 or 0 to
350
u Robust aluminum housing
These sensors are designed to measure rotational move-
ment, e.g. throttle angle, spring travel, gearbox position
or steering angle.
housings and the bearings are made of high tempera-
ture resistant plastic. The mounting plate is protected
with a metal cover to ensure a good fixation. The sen-
sors are fitted in a shrink down boot for additional pro-
tection.
The main benefit of these sensors is the combination of
high accuracy, very robust aluminum housing and motor-
sport spec connection.
Application
Measuring range Please see Variations
Variations
RP 50-M RP 130-M RP 350-M
Measuring
range
0 to 50 0 to 130 0 to 350
Total resist-
ance
3 k 4 k 8 k
Max. allowable
contact current
1 mA 10 mA 1 mA
Connector ASL
6-06-05PA-
HE
KPTA
6E6-4P-C-DN
ASL
6-06-05PA-
HE
Mating connec-
tor
ASL
0-06-05SA-
HE
F 02U 000
226-01
KPTA
1E6-4S-C-DN
F 02U 000
108-01
ASL
0-06-05SA-
HE
F 02U 000
226-01
Mechanical Data
Mounting 2 x M4
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V
Maximal power supply 42 V
Total resistance Please see Variations
Current IS 1 A
Max. allowable contact current Please see Variations
Characteristic
Connector Please see Variations
Mating connector Please see Variations
Pin 1 (A) U
S
Pin 2 (B) Gnd
Pin 3 (C) Sig
Pin 4 (D) -
Pin 5 (E) -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
trol units.

4
quest.
Rotary Potentiometer RP 50-M
Dimensions

4
Rotary Potentiometer RP 55
Features
u Measurement range 0 to 55
u Quill shaft mounting
ment, e.g. spring travel.
A rotation moves an internal slider (wiper) on a resistive
element which is supplied with voltage. Thus a voltage
proportional to the angle can be measured. The housing
is made of shock resistant aluminum. The internals are
made of high temperature resistant synthetic material.
The main benefit of this sensor is the special way of
mounting with a quill shaft.
Application
Application 0 to 55
2
at 30 to 500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Mounting di 6 mm
Lifetime 5 x 10
6
rotations
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V
Total resistance 5 k
Current Is 1 A
Characteristic
Direction of rotation Anti-Clockwise
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 (A) U
S
Pin 2 (B) Gnd
Pin 3 (C) Sig
Pin 4 (D) -
Pin 5 (E) -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
trol units.
quest.

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Compact design
ment, e.g. throttle angle or spring travel.
resistant plastic.
The main benefit of this sensor is the combination of a
high quality production part and extremely short dimen-
sions
Application
Application 0 to 86
Angle between internal mechani-
cal stops
95
2
Mechanical Data
Mounting 2 x M4
Lifetime 2 x 10
6
rotations
Housing Synthetic material
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V
Total resistance 2 k 20 %
Current Is 18 A
Characteristic
Max. rotation speed 120 min
-1
Redundancy No
Mating connector
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 334-01
Pin 1 (A) U
S
Pin 2 (B) Gnd
Pin 3 (C) Sig
Pin 4 (D) -
Pin 5 (E) -
Installation Notes
trol units.
The sensor has an internal mechanical stop and a 14.65x2 sealing.
quest.

4
Dimensions

4
Rotary Potentiometer
RP 100/130/308
Features
u Measurement range: 0 to 100, 0 to 130 or 0 to
308
or steering angle.
both high accuracy and motorsports spec connection.
Application
Application Please see variations
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Variations
RP 100 RP 130 RP 308
Measuring range 0 to 100 0 to 130 0 to 308
Total resistance 3 k 20 % 3 k 20 % 5 k 20 %
Mechanical Data
Mounting 2 x M4
Lifetime 50 x 10
6
rotations
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V
Total resistance Please see variations
Current Is 1 A
Characteristic
-1
Both rotation directions are available on request
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 (A) U
S
Pin 2 (B) Gnd
Pin 3 (C) Sig
Pin 4 (D) -
Pin 5 (E) -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
trol units.
motorsport.com
quest.
Data Logging System at our homepage.

4
RP 100
RP 130
RP 308
Dimensions

4
Rotary Potentiometer
RP 100 twin
Features
u Dual output
ment, e.g. gearbox position or throttle angle.
The main benefit of this sensor is the extremely high re-
liability through the redundant sensor design.
Application
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Mounting 2 x M4
Lifetime 50 x 10
6
rotations
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V
Current IS 1 A
Characteristic
Max. rotation speed 120 min-1
Direction of rotation Clockwise
Both rotation directions are available on request
Redundancy
Mating connector
AS 0-07-35SN
F 02U 000 238-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig1
Pin 4 U
S
Pin 5 Gnd
Pin 6 Sig2
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
trol units.

4
Please find further application hints in the offer drawing (www.bosch-
motorsport.com).
quest.
Rotary Potentiometer RP 100 twin
Dimensions

4
M
Features
u Robust aluminum housing
or steering angle.
housing is made of shock resistant aluminum. The inter-
nal is made of high temperature resistant synthetic ma-
terial. The mounting plate is protected with a metal cov-
er to ensure a good fixation. The sensor is fitted in a
shrink down boot for additional protection.
both high accuracy and very tough aluminum housing.
Application
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Mounting 2 x M4
Lifetime 50 x 10
6
rotations
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V
Maximal power supply 42 V
Current Is 1 A
Characteristic
-1
Redundancy No
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 (A) U
S
Pin 2 (B) Gnd
Pin 3 (C) Sig
Pin 4 (D) -
Pin 5 (E) -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
trol units.
quest.

4
Dimensions

4
H
Features
u Hall effect technology
u Analogue output 0.5 to 4.5 V
or steering angle.
The electronic is designed with a magnetic rotary sensor
with Hall elements and digital signal processing. The an-
gular position is provided by a two pole magnet integra-
ted in the sensor shaft. A Hall effect sensor is disposed
between two magnets in association with a movable
specially formed ferromagnetic part. This is used to con-
trol flux in the sensor in order to produce a linearly vary-
ing output voltage dependent on the position.
The main benefit of this sensor is its contactless Hall ef-
fect technology and its robust design for motorsport ap-
plications. Other measurement ranges are available on
request.
Application
Operating temperature range -40 to 140C (5 V supply)
2
at 5 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Mounting 2 x M4
Lifetime 20 x 10
6
operations of 75
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 V regulated
9 V to 30 V unregulated
Total resistance 10 k
Current Is < 12.5 mA
Resolution 0.025 % of measurement range
Output voltage range 0.5 to 4.5 V
Output load 10 k
Characteristic
-1
Temp. coefficient < 30 ppm/K in 5 V supply mode
< 90 ppm/K in 9 V to 30 V sup-
ply mode
< 90 ppm/K in 9 V to 30 V sup-
ply mode
Redundancy No
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 (A) U
S
Pin 2 (B) Gnd
Pin 3 (C) Sig
Pin 4 (D) -
Pin 5 (E) -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 22
Wire length L 16 cm

4
quest.
Installation Notes
trol units.
The sensor is designed with contactless Hall effect technology.
Any mounting orientation is possible.
Sensor is at mid point of electrical angle when shaft and wire exit are
aligned as shown in the offer drawing.
Operating temperature range for unregulated supply: -40 to 137C (9
V supply). Derate upper temperature limit by 0.57C for every 1 V in-
crease in supply, e.g. -40 to 125C at 30 V.
Both rotation directions and other measurement ranges are available
on request.
page.
Rotary Potentiometer RP 360-H
Dimensions

4
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-P
Features
u Camshaft or Wheel speed
u 24.0 mm depth
u Robust design
u Active low
This sensor is designed for incremental measurement of
rotational speed (e.g. camshaft or wheel speed).
Due to the rotation of a ferromagnetic target wheel in
front of the HA-P, the magnetic field is modulated at the
place of the Hall probe. A Hall-effect sensor element
with integrated signal conditioning circuit detects this
change and generates a digital output signal.
nation of a high quality production part and robust de-
sign with metal housing.
Application
Application Speed
Max. frequency 10 kHz
Target wheel air gap 0.5 to 1.4 mm
Output type Active low
Output circuit Open collector for 1 k
2
at 10 Hz to 2 kHz
Mechanical Data
Mounting With screw 1 x M6
Bore diameter 18 mm
Installation depth L2 24 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply 4.5 to 24 V
Current IS 10 mA
Characteristic
Accuracy repeatability of the fall-
ing edge of tooth
< 1.5 % (6 kHz)
< 2 % (10 kHz)
Signal output 0.4 V to < US
Environment
Target wheel diameter D 162.34 mm
Thickness t 12.5 mm
Width of teeth b1 3.8 mm
Width of gap b2 4.7 mm
Width of sync. gap b3 20.79 mm
Depth of teeth h 3.4 mm
Number of teeth 60-2
Connector 1 928 404 227
Mating connector
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 335-01
Pin 1 Gnd
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 U
S
Installation Notes
The HA-P can be connected directly to most control units and data log-
ging systems.
For mounting please use only the integrated plug.
If a wheel with different dimensions is used (see Environment), the
technical function has to be tested individually.
page.
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-P
Sensors | Speed Sensors | 309

4
Dimensions
310 | Sensors | Speed Sensors

4
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-
P2
Features
u Wheel/camshaft/crankshaft speed
u 15 mm depth
u Very small housing
u Very light weight
u Active low
rotational speed (e.g. camshaft, crankshaft or wheel-
speed).
front of the HA-P2, the magnetic field is modulated at
the place of the Hall probe. A Hall-effect sensor element
change and generates a digital output signal.
nation of a high quality production part, robust design,
very small housing and low weight.
Application
Application
Application Speed
External magnetic fields < 0.1 mT
2
at 10 Hz to 2 kHz
Mechanical Data
Bore diameter 15 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply US 4.75 to 18 V
Current Is 10 mA
Characteristic
Accuracy repeatability of the falling edge of tooth
up to 1.5 mm
up to 2.5 mm
< 4 % ( 10 kHz)
< 8 % ( 10 kHz)
Signal output 0.4 V to < U
S
Connector Hirschmann 872-658-501
Cod.A
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Sig
Pin 3 Gnd
Environment
Thickness t 12.5 mm
Depth of teeth h1 3.4 mm
Installation Notes
Application Notes
The HA-P2 can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems.
page.

4
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-P2
Dimensions

4
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor Mini-
HA-P
Features
u Camshaft or Wheel speed
u Max. frequency 10 kHz
u High vibration resistance
u Low weight
u Small housing
rotational speed (e.g. camshaft or wheel speed).
front of the Mini-HA-P, the magnetic field is modulated
at the place of the Hall probe. A Hall-effect sensor ele-
ment with integrated signal conditioning circuit detects
this change and generates a digital output signal.
sign with a very small housing.
Application
Application Speed
External magnetic fields 0.3 mT
2
at 10 Hz to 2 kHz
Variations
Connector ASL 6-06-05PC-HE 1 234 482 092
Mating connector ASL 0-06-05SC-HE F 02U B00 555-01
Pin 1 U
S
U
S
Pin 2 Gnd Sig
Pin 3 Sig Gnd
Pin 4 Nc -
Pin 5 Nc -
Mechanical Data
Bore diameter 11.5 mm
Electrical Data
Current IS 10 mA
Characteristic
ing edge of tooth
< 3 % ( 6 kHz)
< 5 % ( 10 kHz)
S
Environment
Thickness t 12.5 mm
Sleeve HT wire 5.2 mm
Wire size AWG 20
Wire length L < 27 cm
Installation Notes
The Mini-HA-P can be connected directly to most control units and da-
ta logging systems.

4
page.
Mini-HA-P
ASL 6-06-05PC-HE
Mini-HA-P
1 234 482 092

4
Dimensions

4

4
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor Mini-
HA-P sealed
Features
u Wheel/camshaft/crankshaft speed
u High vibration resistance
u Very small housing
u O-ring sealing
rotational speed (e.g. camshaft, crankshaft and wheel-
speed).
front of the Mini-HA-P sealed, the magnetic field is
modulated at the place of the Hall probe. A Hall-effect
sensor element with integrated signal conditioning cir-
cuit detects this change and generates a digital output
signal.
nation of a high quality production part and a robust de-
sign with a very small housing.
Application
Application Speed
External magnetic fields 0.3 mT
2
at 10 Hz to 2 kHz
Variations
Connector ASL 6-06-05PC-HE Without connector
Mating connector ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
-
Pin 1 U
S
U
S
(red)
Pin 2 Gnd Sig (green)
Pin 3 Sig Gnd (black)
Pin 4 Nc -
Pin 5 Nc -
Mechanical Data
Bore diameter 16 mm
Electrical Data
Current IS 10 mA
Characteristic
ing edge of tooth
< 3 % (6 kHz)
< 5 % (10 kHz)
S
Environment
Thickness t 12.5 mm
Sleeve HT wire 5.2 mm
Wire size AWG 20
Wire length L < 27 cm
quest.

4
Installation Notes
The Mini-HA-P sealed can be connected directly to most control units
page.
Mini-HA-P sealed
ASL 6-06-05PC-HE
Mini-HA-P sealed
without connector
Dimensions

4
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-M
Features
u Camshaft/crankshaft/wheel speed
u Self-learning
u Active high/low programmable
rotational speed (e.g. camshaft, crankshaft or wheel
speed).
front of the HA-M, the magnetic field is modulated at the
place of the Hall probe. A Hall-effect sensor element
change and generates a digital output signal. We offer
this sensor with two different types of output: Active
high and Active low.
sign with metal housing and motorsport connectors.
Application
Application Speed
Temperature range - 40 to 160C
Output circuit Open collector for 1 kOhm
Output type Please see Ordering Information
External magnetic fields < 1 mT
2
at 10 Hz to 2 kHz
Variations
Active low with connector / active high with connector
Connector ASU 6-03-03PN-HE
Mating connector
ASU 0-03-03SN-HE
F 02U 000 199-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Active high, without connector
Red U
S
Black Gnd
Green Sig
Mechanical Data
Mounting 1 x M6
Electrical Data
Current I
S
5.6 to 18 mA
Characteristic
ing edge of tooth
< 4 % ( 6 kHz)
< 8 % ( 10 kHz)
Signal output 0.52 V to < Us
Environment
Thickness t 12.5 mm
Pin layout Please see Variations
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The HA-M can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems.

4
page.
HA-M
Active low
HA-M
Active high
HA-M
Active high, without connector
Dimensions

4
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-
D 90
Features
u Wheel/camshaft*/crankshaft speed
u Also available with 0, 180 and 270 mounting po-
sition
u Very high precision measurement
u Self-learning
u Measuring of differences with 2 Hall sensors
rotational speed (e.g. camshaft*, crankshaft or wheel
speed), but it is not a true power-on sensor.
front of the HA-D 90, the magnetic field is modulated at
the place of the Hall probe.
The main feature and benefit of this sensor is a very
good detection of the falling edge, due to a differential
measuring method. This sensor is a combination of a
high quality production part and robust design with a
small housing.
*: see Installation Notes
Application
Application Speed
Target wheel air gap AG 0.4 to 1.0 mm
Output type Active high
External magnetic fields 50 mT
2
at 10 Hz to 2 kHz
Mechanical Data
Mounting Screw 1 x M6
Electrical Data
Current IS 20 mA
Characteristic
ing edge of tooth
< 1.0 % ( 6 kHz)
< 1.5 % ( 10 kHz)
S
Environment
Thickness t 12.5 mm
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SC-HE
F 02U 000 228-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 Nc
Pin 5 Nc
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The HA-D 90 is no true-power-on sensor. It needs the falling edge of
two teeth for correct working. After a time of 0.68 s without rotation
of the detected wheel it needs again the falling edge of two teeth.
The HA-D 90 can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems
Please specify the angle between the mounting and the target wheel.

4
page.
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-D 90
Dimensions

4
Inductive Speed Sensor IA-C
Features
u Crankshaft/wheel speed
u 24.0 mm, 315 depth/lead
u Bore diameter 18 mm
rotational speed (e.g. crankshaft or wheelspeed).
The inductive sensor consists of a bar magnet with a
soft magnetic pole pin supporting an induction coil with
two connections. Every time a ferromagnetic ring gear
turns past this sensor, it generates a voltage in the coil
which is directly proportional to the periodic variation in
the magnetic flux. The rotational speed is reflected on a
periodic interval between the voltages zero transition
points.
It is available in a DR-25 sleeve with various connector
options.
high quality production part and robust, compact de-
sign.
Application
Application Speed
Target wheel air gap AG 0.8 0.3 mm
Operating temp. range (sensing
head)
-40 to 130C
2
max. 80 h
Mechanical Data
Magnetic pole Round
Bore diameter 18 mm
Installation depth L2 23.7 mm
Electrical Data
Coil resistance 860 10 %
Inductance max. 370 mH 15 %
Output voltage max. 200 VP-P
Environment
Thickness t > 5 mm
Connector 1 928 404 227
Mating connector
3-pole Compact
D 261 205 335-01
Pin 1 Sig+
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Scr
quest.
Installation Notes
The inductive speed sensor IA-C is developed for wheels made of fer-
romagnetic material.
Please contact our technical consultancy for more information.

4
page.
The inductive speed sensor IA-C is developed for wheels made of fer-
Inductive Speed Sensor IA-C
Dimensions

4
Inductive Speed Sensor IA
Features
u 32.2 mm depth/lead
u Bore diameter 12.5 mm
u Max. operating temperature 230C
rotational speed (e.g. crankshaft or wheel speed).
points.
high quality production part and robust, high tempera-
ture resistance. Additionally the installation depth can
be changed according to the customer request.
Application
Application Speed
head)
-40 to 230C
2
max. 80 h
Mechanical Data
Magnetic pole Round
Electrical Data
Coil resistance 1,200
Inductance max. 400 mH
Output voltage max. 190 V
P-P
Environment
Thickness t > 5 mm
Connector ASL 6-06-05SN-HE
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05PN-HE
F 02U 000 237-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 Scr
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24

4
Installation Notes
The inductive speed sensor IA is developed for wheels made of ferro-
magnetic material.
The installation depth L2 can be changed individually according to
customer request.
page.
Inductive Speed Sensor IA
Dimensions

4
Inductive Speed Sensor IS
Features
u 32.2 mm depth/lead
u Max. operating temperature 230C
points.
high quality production part and robust, high tempera-
ture resistance. Additionally the installation depth can
be changed according to the customer request.
Application
Application Speed
head)
-40 to 230C
2
max. 80 h
Mechanical Data
Magnetic pole Round
Electrical Data
Coil resistance 1,200
Output voltage max. 190 V P-P
Environment
Thickness t > 5 mm
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05PN-HE
F 02U 000 237-01
Pin 1 Nc
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Sig+
Pin 4 Nc
Pin 5 Scr
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24

4
Installation Notes
The inductive speed sensor IS is developed for wheels made of ferro-
magnetic material.
The installation depth L2 can be changed individually according to
customer request.
page.
Inductive Speed Sensor IS
Dimensions

4
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-C
Features
u Crankshaft or Wheel speed
u 3/8-24 UNF-2A THD
u Metal housing
points.
high quality production part with very compact design,
and high temperature resistance.
Application
Application Speed
head)
-40 to 230C
2
max. 80 h
Mechanical Data
Magnetic pole Round
Electrical Data
Coil resistance 340
Environment
Thickness t > 5 mm
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05PN-HE
F 02U 000 237-01
Pin 1 Nc
Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 Sig+
Pin 4 Nc
Pin 5 Scr
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24

4
Installation Notes
The inductive speed sensor IS-C is developed for wheels made of fer-
This sensor is also available with a M10x1 male thread.
page.
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-C
Dimensions

4
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-T
Features
u Turbocharger speed
u Max. 15 mm depth/lead
u Metal housing
rotational speed of a turbo charger.
points.
The main benefit of this sensor is robustness, a very
compact design and high temperature resistance.
Application
Application Speed
head)
-40 to 230C
2
max. 80 h
Mechanical Data
Magnetic pole Round
Tightening torque 1.4 Nm
Electrical Data
Coil resistance 30
Inductance max. 2.6 mH
Environment
Thickness t > 5 mm
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05PN-HE
F 02U 000 237-01
Pin 1 Nc
Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 Nc
Pin 5 Scr
quest.
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
This inductive speed sensor IS-T is developed for wheels made of fer-
romagnetic material by turbo charger.
page.

4
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-T
Dimensions

4
Temperature Sensor NTC M5-
HS
Features
u Wide measurement range: -55 to 300C
u Strong protection against ambient temperature
u Compact and robust design
This sensor is designed to measure temperatures up to
300C of oil, water, fuel or air. This signal is used as a
control value for engine control units or as a measure-
ment value which is logged in a data acquisition system.
The NTC-sensing element has a negative temperature
coefficient. This means, that with increasing tempera-
ture the conductivity rises and the resistance decreases.
To improve a good protection against the ambient tem-
perature, the housing is made of stainless steel and
partly filled with an isolation-paste.
The main benefit of the sensor is a very compact design
and its very short response time.
Application
Application -55 to 300C
Bio fuel compatibility -
Mechanical Data
Male thread M5x1
Wrench size 8 mm
Weight w/o wire 6 g
Sealing O-Ring 4 x 1 mm
Electrical Data
Characteristic NTC
Characteristic
Accuracy at 25C (homogeneous
cond.)
0.3C
Accuracy at 100C (homogene-
ous cond.)
1.3C
Rel. resistance tolerance at 25C 1 %
Response time tau in still water
63
< 4 s
Characteristic Application
T [C] R []
-55 519,910
-35 158,090
-20 71,668
-10 44,087
0 27,936
10 18,187
20 12,136
25 10,000
30 8,284
40 5,774
50 4,103
60 2,967
70 2,182
80 1,629
90 1,234
100 946.6
120 578.1
140 368.8
160 244.4
180 167.6
200 118.5
220 86.08
240 64.08
260 48.76
280 37.86
300 29.94
Sensors | Temperature Sensors | 333

4
Connector ASL 6-06-05PN-HE
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SN-HE
F 02U 000 231-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Sig+
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
quest.

Wire size AWG 24

Installation Notes
The NTC M5-HS can be connected directly to most control units using
a pull-up resistance (typically 1 or 3 k) .
page.
Temperature Sensor NTC M5-HS
Dimensions
334 | Sensors | Temperature Sensors

4
Temperature Sensor NTC M6-H
Features
This sensor is designed to measure fluid temperatures
e.g. oil, water or fuel. This signal may be used as a con-
trol value for engine control units or as a measurement
value which is logged in a data acquisition system.
The NTC sensing element has a negative temperature
The sensing element is a lacquer-coated thermistor disk
which is connected via a copper-clad Fe wire to a AWG
24 wire. To improve the response time, the element is
molded into a high performance heat paste.
The main benefit of the sensor is the combination of
both high quality production part and a robust, compact
design. It is especially designed to measure high tem-
peratures (up to 300C).
Application
2
at 5 to 500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Male thread M6x1
Wrench size 10 mm
Sealing O-Ring 4.47 x 1.78 mm
Electrical Data
Characteristic NTC
Max. power at 25C 200 mW
Nominal resistance at 25C 49.12 k
Characteristic
Accuracy at 25C 1.84C
Response time tau 63 in still wa-
ter
< 7 s
T [C] R []
-25 657,350
-15 365,040
0 162,210
10 98,322
25 49,120
40 26,065
60 12,140
80 6,119
100 3,300
120 1,885
140 1,132
160 710
180 463
200 312
220 217
240 155
260 113
280 85
300 64

4
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SN-HE
F 02U 000 231-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Sig+
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
quest.
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
The NTC M6-H can be connected directly to most control units using a
pull-up resistor (typically 1 or 3 k).
Dimensions

4
HS
Features
u Robust design
300 C of oil, water, fuel or air. This signal is used as a
The main benefit of the sensor is a very robust and com-
pact design and its very short response time.
Application
Application -55 to 300 C
Storage temperature range 0 to 100 C
Mechanical Data
Male thread M6x1
Wrench size 10 mm
Electrical Data
Characteristic NTC
Nominal resistance at 25 C 10 k
Characteristic
Accuracy at 25 C (homogene-
ous cond.)
0.3 C
Accuracy at 100 C (homogene-
ous cond.)
1.3 C
ter
< 4 s
T [C] R []
-55 519,910
-35 158,090
-20 71,668
-10 44,087
0 27,936
10 18,187
20 12,136
25 10,000
30 8,284
40 5,774
50 4,103
60 2,967
70 2,182
80 1,629
90 1,234
100 946.6
110 735.5
120 578.1
130 459.4
140 368.8
150 298.9
160 244.4
170 201.6
180 167.6
190 140.4
200 118.5
210 100.7
220 86.08
230 74.05
240 64.08
250 55.75
260 48.76

4
270 42.87
280 37.86
290 33.59
300 29.94
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SN-HE
F 02U 000 231-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Sig+
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
quest.
Wire size AWG 24
Installation Notes
a pull-up resistor (typically 1 or 3 k).
Logging at our homepage.
Dimensions

4
HS
Features
u Robust design
300C of oil, water, fuel or air. This signal is used as a
The main benefit of the sensor is a very robust design
and its very short response time.
Application
Mechanical Data
Male thread M8x1
Wrench size 12 mm
Weight w/o wire 8 g
Electrical Data
Characteristic NTC
Characteristic
Accuracy at 25C (homogeneous
cond.)
0.3C
Accuracy at 100C (homogene-
ous cond.)
1.3C
Response time tau in still water
63
< 4 s
T [C] R []
-55 519,910
-35 158,090
-20 71,668
-10 44,087
0 27,936
10 18,187
20 12,136
25 10,000
30 8,284
40 5,774
50 4,103
60 2,967
70 2,182
80 1,629
90 1,234
100 946.6
110 735.5
120 578.1
130 459.4
140 368.8
150 298.9
160 244.4
170 201.6
180 167.6
190 140.4
200 118.5
210 100.7
220 86.08
230 74.05
240 64.08
250 55.75
260 48.76

4
270 42.87
280 37.86
290 33.59
300 29.94
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SN-HE
F 02U 000 231-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Sig+
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
quest.
Wire size AWG 24

Installation Notes
Dimensions

4
Temperature Sensor NTC M12
Features
u Measurement range: -40 to 130C
u Robust design
ture the conductivity rises. The sensing element of the
temperature sensor is made of semiconducting heavy
metal oxide and oxidized mixed crystals, which are
equipped with a protective housing.
The main benefit of the sensor is the combination of a
high quality production part and a robust compact de-
sign.
Application
Storage temp. range 0 to 100C
2
Mechanical Data
Male thread M12x1.5
Wrench size 19 mm
Sealing Not included
Electrical Data
Characteristic NTC
Nominal resistance at 20C 2.5 k 5 %
Characteristic
ter
< 15 s
T [C] R []
-40 45,313
-30 26,114
-20 15,462
-10 9,397
0 5,896
10 3,792
20 2,500
30 1,707
40 1,175
50 834
60 596
70 436
80 323
90 243
100 187
110 144
120 113
130 89
Mating connector
2-pole Jetronic
D 261 205 288-01
Pin 1 SIG+
Pin 2 SIG-

4
Installation Notes
The NTC M12 can be connected directly to most control units using a
motorsport.com
Data Logging at our homepage.
Temperature Sensor NTC M12
Dimensions

4
H
Features
u Robust design
high quality production part and a robust compact de-
sign.
Application
2
Mechanical Data
Male thread M12x1.5
Wrench size 19 mm
Sealing Al-washer
Electrical Data
Characteristic NTC
Nominal resistance at 20C 2.5 k 20C
Characteristic
ter
< 15 s
T [C] R []
-40 45,313
-30 26,114
-20 15,462
-10 9,397
0 5,896
10 3,792
20 2,500
30 1,707
40 1,175
50 834
60 596
70 436
80 323
90 243
100 187
110 144
120 113
130 89
140 71
150 57
Mating connector
2-pole Compact
D 261 205 337-01
Pin 1 SIG+
Pin 2 SIG-

4
Installation Notes
The NTC M12-H can be connected directly to most control units using
Dimensions

4
L
Features
u Air temperature measurement
u Robust design
This sensor is designed to measure air temperature e.g.
in the air box or ambient temperature. The signal may
be used as a control value for engine control units or as
a measurement value which is logged in a data acquisi-
tion system.
high quality production part and a robust and compact
design.
Application
2
at 50 to 250 Hz
Mechanical Data
Male thread M12x1.5
Wrench size 19 mm
Sealing Not included
Electrical Data
Characteristic NTC
Nominal resistance 5% 2.5 k at 20C
Characteristic
Response Time tau 63 in still wa-
ter
< 10 s
T [C] R []
-40 45,313
-30 26,114
-20 15,462
-10 9,397
0 5,896
10 3,792
20 2,500
30 1,707
40 1,175
50 834
60 596
70 436
80 323
90 243
100 187
110 144
120 113
130 89
140 71
Mating connector
2-pole Jetronic
D 261 205 288-01
Pin 1 SIG+
Pin 2 SIG-

4
Installation Notes
The NTC M12-L can be connected directly to most control units using
Temperature Sensor NTC M12-L
Dimensions

4
Temperature Sensor PT 200E
Features
u Exhaust gas temperature measurements
u Wide measurement range: -40 to 1,000C
u Short response time
The PT 200E is designed to measure exhaust gas tem-
peratures up to 1,000C.
The sensor element has a positive temperature coeffi-
cient. This means, that with increasing ambient temper-
ature the conductivity decreases and the resistance
rises. The opened housing exposes the sensor directly
into the gas flow in order to improve its performance.
The main benefit of the sensor is a very robust and com-
pact design and its wide measurement range.
Application
Application -40 to 1,000C
Storage temp. range 0 to 100C
Mechanical Data
Male thread M14x1.5
Wrench size 19 mm
Electrical Data
Characteristic PTC
Characteristic
Accuracy at -40 to 200C 3C
Relative resistance tolerance at
> 200C
1.5 %
T [C] R []
-40 170
-25 181
0 201
25 220
50 239
75 257
100 276
150 313
200 349
250 385
300 420
350 454
400 488
450 521
500 554
550 586
600 618
650 649
700 679
750 709
800 738
850 767
900 795
Connector ASL 6-06-05PD-HE
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SD-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 n.c.
Pin 2 SIG+
Pin 3 SIG-
Pin 4 n.c.
Pin 5 n.c.
Wire size AWG 24

4
Various motorsports and automotive connectors are available on re-
quest.
Installation Notes
The PT 200E can be connected directly to most control units using a
Please check the offer drawing for a correct mounting orientation.
Please use the mounting part for a correct fixation of the sensor (not
included, available on request).
Temperature Sensor PT 200E
Accessories
Temperature Sensor PT 200E Adapter
Dimensions
Sensor
Adapter

4
Temperature Sensors Infrared
TI-16-r/-s
Features
u Non-contact temperature measurement
u Measurement range: 0 to 160C
u Analog output (0 to 5 V)
u Compact size and robust housing
This infrared temperature sensor is designed for non-
contact surface temperature measurement of various
parts (e.g. tires or cylinder heads) based on IR radia-
tion.
Using ruggedized silicon-coated optics with internal
electronics and cabling packaged inside stainless steel
housing, this sensor measures the emitted infrared radi-
ation of an object and calculates its temperature. The
output signal has a linear characteristic (temperature vs.
output voltage).
The main features of this sensor are its compact size,
robust design, and high signal quality at a low cost. In
addition, it offers the ability to change the temperature
range, the output voltage and emissivity by request.
Application
Application 0 to 160C
head)
-20 to 120C
Operating temp. range (electron-
ics)
-20 to 70C
Relative humidity 10 to 95 %
Max. vibration any axis 30 m/s
2
at 11 to 200 Hz
500 m/s
2
, 11 ms shock
Variations
TI-16-r TI-16-s
Optimized for
measuring of
Rubber Steel
Emissivity (prede-
fined)
0.95 0.80
Mechanical Data
Male thread M12x1 mm
Wrench size 14 mm
Length housing 28 mm
Weight with wire 1 m 70 g
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 to 28 V
Max power supply U
S
28 V
Full scale output UA 0 to 5 V
Current IS 9 mA
Characteristic
Emissivity (predefined) Please see Variations
Optical resolution 10 : 1
Spectral range 8 to 14 m
Temperature resolution at T
obj
<
100C
0.1C
System accuracy at 23C t
amb
or
max. value
1.5C or 1.5 %
Repeatability at 23C t
amb
or
max. value
0.75C or 0.75 %
Sensitivity 31.25 mV/C
Offset 0 mV
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SN-HE
F 02U 000 231-01

Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 Prg
Pin 5 Scr
quest.
Sleeve Viton
Wire size AWG 26

4
Installation Notes
The TI-16 can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems.
The temperature measurement range can be changed anywhere in the
range of -20C to160C per request.
The emissivity can be changed by request.
The predefined emissivity can differ from the real emissivity.
To determine the emissivity, please contact Bosch Motorsport for as-
sistance.
Sensor can be mounted in any orientation.
Do not disconnect the electronics housing from the sensor.
The sensor meets the EMV qualification 89/336/EWG.
To clean the lens, use only a soft, wet (water or water based glass
cleaner) cloth -> NO DISSOLVER cleaner!
page.
TI-16-r
TI-16-s
Dimensions

4
Temperature Sensors Infrared
TI-100-s/-c
Features
u Non-contact temperature measurement
u Measurement range: 0 to 1,000C
u Compact size and robust housing
This infrared temperature sensor is designed for non-
contact surface temperature measurement of various
parts (e.g. tires or cylinder heads) based on IR radia-
tion.
Using ruggedized silicon-coated optics with internal
electronics and cabling packaged inside stainless steel
housing, this sensor measures the emitted infrared radi-
ation of an object and calculates its temperature. The
output signal has a linear characteristic (temperature vs.
output voltage).
The main features of this sensor are its compact size,
robust design, and high signal quality at a low cost. In
addition, it offers the ability to change the temperature
range, the output voltage and emissivity by request.
Application
Application 0 to 1,000C
head)
-20 to 120C
Operating temp. range (electron-
ics)
-20 to 70C
Relative humidity 10 to 95 %
Max. vibration any axis 30 m/s
2
at 11 to 200 Hz
500 m/s
2
, 11 ms shock
Variations
TI-100-s TI-100-C
Optimized for
measuring of
Steel Carbon
Emissivity (prede-
fined)
0.80 0.75
Mechanical Data
Male thread M12x1 mm
Wrench size 14 mm
Length housing 28 mm
Weight with wire 1 m 70 g
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
5 to 28 V
Max power supply U
S
28 V
Full scale output UA 0 to 5 V
Current IS 9 mA
Characteristic
Emissivity (predefined) Please see Variations
Optical resolution 10 : 1
Spectral range 8 to 14 m
Temperature resolution at T
obj
<
100C
0.1C
System accuracy at 23C t
amb
or
max. value
1.5C or 1.5 %
Repeatability at 23C t
amb
or max.
value
0.75C or 0.75 %
Sensitivity 31.25 mV/C
Offset 0 mV
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SN-HE
F 02U 000 231-01

Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 Prg
Pin 5 Scr
quest.
Sleeve Viton
Wire size AWG 26

4
Installation Notes
The TI-100 can be connected directly to most control units and data
logging systems.
The temperature measurement range can be changed anywhere in the
range of -20C to 1,000C per request.
The emissivity can be changed by request.
The predefined emissivity can differ from the real emissivity.
To determine the emissivity, please contact Bosch Motorsport for as-
sistance.
Sensor can be mounted in any orientation.
Do not disconnect the electronics housing from the sensor.
The sensor meets the EMV qualification 89/336/EWG.
To clean the lens, use only a soft, wet (water or water based glass
cleaner) cloth -> NO DISSOLVER cleaner!
page.
TI-100-s
TI-100-c
Dimensions

4
Thermocouple Probe TCP K
Features
u Thermocouple Type K
u Thermo material: NiCr-Ni
u Measurement range: -200 to 1,000C (1,300C)
u Flexible mounting depth
u Analog output (Thermo voltage)
This sensor is designed to measure exhaust gas temper-
atures up to 1,300C.
Thermocouples are temperature sensors, which gener-
ates a small temperature corresponding voltage, due to
their thermo electrical behaviour, without any additional
external energy. The mantle thermocouple has a metal
mantle which includes two inner wires made of thermo
material (NiCr-Ni). The wires are isolated.
The main feature and benefit of this sensor is a very
quick response time, the combination of high quality
production part and robust design with metal housing
and motorsport connector.
Application
Application -200 to 1,000C (1,300)C
2
at 5 to 500 Hz
Mechanical Data
Male thread See adapter
Wrench size See adapter
Installation torque See adapter
Weight with wire 47 g
Sensor tip bend radius R 20
Electrical Data
Voltage supply NiCr/Ni Typ K
Full scale output DIN IEC 584-1
Accuracy (max. value) 1.5 C or 0.004 * t
T [C]
-200
U [mV]
-5.891
-100 -3.554
0 0.000
100 4.096
200 8.138
300 12.209
400 16.397
500 20.644
600 24.905
700 29.129
800 33.275
900 37.326
1,000 41.276
1,100 45.119
1,200 48.838
1,300 52.410
Mating connector
ASL 0-06-05SD-HE
F 02U 000 229-01
Pin 1 -
Pin 2 Sig-
Pin 3 Sig+
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 Src
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Sensors | Thermocouple Probes | 353

4
Installation Notes
The TCP K can be connected to Bosch Motorsport ECUs with thermo-
couple inputs (w/o pull-up resistant) or to external devices, which am-
plify the sensor voltage.
Recommended max. continuous utilization temperature 1,000C,
short-term utilization temperature 1,300C.
The sensor can be mounted individually according to the customer re-
quest.
The sensor tip is flexible/ bendable and can be fixed by a special
adapter (B 261 209 159-01).
The length of the sensor tip can be modified on request.
Thermocouple Probe TCP K
Accessories
Thermocouple Probe TCP K Adapter
Dimensions
Sensor
Adapter
354 | Sensors | Thermocouple Probes

4
Thermocouple Probe TCP KA
Features
Thermocouples are temperature sensors, which supply a
temperature corresponding voltage, due to its thermo-
electric behavior, without any additional external energy
source. The mantle thermocouple has a metal mantle
which includes two inner wires made of thermo material
(Ni CrSi - NiSi). The wires are isolated. The voltage is
amplified by an electronic circuit, which is powered by
12 V and supplies an output signal from 0 to 5 V. Please
note that the operating temperature of the external
electronics is from 0 to 120C.
nation of high quality production part, robust design
and its integrated amplifier.
Application
Operating temp. range (ext.
electronics)
0 to 120C
Mechanical Data
Male thread M12x1
Wrench size 17 mm
Length 250 mm
Electrical Data
Voltage supply 12 V
Full scale output 0 to 5 V
Measuring range 0 to 1,250C
T [C] U [mV]
0 0
50 197
100 399
200 793
300 1,190
400 1,598
500 2,012
600 2,427
700 2,839
800 3,243
900 3,638
1,000 4,022
1,100 4,396
1,200 4,759
1,250 5,000
Connector F 02U B00 292-01
Pin 1 Sig
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 U
S
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24

4
Installation Notes
The TCP KA can be connected to Bosch Motorsport ECUs with a 0 to 5
V analog signal input (w/o pull-up resistor) or to external data logging
devices.
The sensor can be mounted individually according to the customers
request.
Please note that the operating temperature range of the external elec-
tronics is from 0 to 120C.
Recommended bending radius of the wire of the sensor element is
minimum 20 mm to ensure the sensor works properly and for a longer
lifespan of the sensor.
free download of the sensor configuration file (*.sdf) for Bosch Data
Thermocouple Probe TCP KA
Accessories
Thermocouple Probe TCP KA Adapter
Dimensions
Sensor

4
Adapter

4
Thermocouple Probe TCP KN 2
Features
Thermocouples are temperature sensors, which supply a
temperature corresponding voltage without any addi-
tional external energy source. The mantle thermocouple
has a metal mantle which includes two isolated wires
made of thermomaterial NiCr-Ni Type K. The voltage is
amplified by an electronic circuit, which is powered by
12 V and supplies an output signal from 0 to 5 V. The
sensing element is protected with a double housing
made of Nimonic 75 to make possible its application be-
fore turbo chargers. Please note that the operating tem-
perature of the external electronics is from 0 to 125C.
nation of high quality production part, robust design
and its integrated amplifier.
Application
Operating temp. range (ext.
electronics)
0 to 125C
Mechanical Data
Male thread M14x1.5
Wrench size 17 mm
Length 81 mm
Electrical Data
Voltage supply 5 to 16 V
Full scale output 0 to 5 V
Measuring range 0 to 1,250C
T [C] U [mV]
0 0
50 197
100 399
200 793
300 1,190
400 1,598
500 2,012
600 2,427
700 2,839
800 3,243
900 3,638
1,000 4,022
1,100 4,396
1,200 4,759
1,250 5,000
Connector ASU 6-03-03PB-HE
Mating connector ASU 3-03-03SB-HE
Pin 1 Power Supply
Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 Signal
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24

4
Installation Notes
The TCP KN2 can be connected to Bosch Motorsport ECUs with a 0 to
5 V analog signal input (w/o pull-up resistor) or to external data log-
ging devices.
The sensor can be mounted individually according to the customers
request.
Please note that the operating temperature range of the external elec-
tronics is from 0 to 125C.
Recommended bending radius of the wire of the sensor element is
minimum 20 mm to ensure the sensor works properly and for a longer
lifespan of the sensor.
download of the sensor configuration file (*.sdf) for Bosch Data Log-
ging System at our homepage.
TCP KN2
Dimensions

4
Wire Potentiometer WP 35
Features
u Compact design
u Analog output: 0 to 5 V
The WP 35 is a wire potentiometer which is designed to
measure position, direction, or rate of motion of moving
mechanical components.
This sensor converts mechanical movement into electri-
cal signal using a stainless steel cable wounded on a
threaded drum that is coupled to a precision rotary sen-
sor. Hence the electrical output is proportional to the
distance travelled.
The advantage of this WP is its compact style which al-
lows for flexible and easy installation. Due to its small
size, precise measurement is possible even in difficult
applications.
Application
Max. wire acceleration 290 m/s
2
Max. wire tension 1.7 N
Shock 1,000 m/s
2
for 6 ms
Vibration 150 m/s
2
at 10 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
Possible mechanical range 38.1 mm
Mounting 2 x 2-56 UNC
Life expectancy 5 x 10
6
cycles
Protection IP54
Dimensions 19.1 x 19.1 x 9.7 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Non-linearity 1 %
Max. current 12 mA
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
The WP 35 can be connected directly to most electronic control units
Holder for specific mounting orientation is available on request.
The angle of the displacement wire should be in the range of 5 to 10
from normal direction to avoid damaging the housing.
Do not allow the wire to snap back (freely retract). This will cause
damage and void the warranty. Tension must be maintained on the
wire at all times.
page.
360 | Sensors | Wire Potentiometers

4
Dimensions
Sensors | Wire Potentiometers | 361

4
Features
u Compact design
distance travelled.
applications.
Application
2
Shock 1,000 m/s
2
for 6 ms
Vibration 150 m/s
2
at 10 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
6
cycles
Protection IP54
Dimensions 24.4 x 11.4 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Non-linearity 0.5 %
Max. current 12 mA
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
wire at all times.
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Compact design
distance travelled.
applications.
Application
2
Shock 1,000 m/s
2
for 6 ms
Vibration 150 m/s
2
at 10 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
6
cycles
Protection IP54
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Non-linearity 0.5 %
Max. current 12 mA
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
wire at all times.
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Compact design
The WP 100 is a wire potentiometer which is designed
to measure position, direction, or rate of motion of mov-
ing mechanical components.
distance travelled.
applications.
Application
2
Shock 1,000 m/s
2
for 6 ms
Vibration 150 m/s
2
at 10 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
6
cycles
Protection IP54
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Non-linearity 0.5 %
Max. current 12 mA
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
The WP 100 can be connected directly to most electronic control
wire at all times.
page.

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Compact design
to measure position, direction or rate of motion of mov-
distance travelled.
applications.
Application
Mechanical Data
Possible mechanical range 120 mm
Mounting 2 x 4 & 4.8
6
cycles
Dimensions 45.7 x 44.5 x 59.7 mm
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Resistance tolerance 0.15 %
Non-linearity 1 %
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
wire at all times.
page.
Order number F 01T A21 250

4
Dimensions

4
Features
u Compact design
to measure position, direction, or rate of motion of mov-
distance travelled.
applications.
Application
2
Shock 1,000 m/s
2
for 6 ms
Vibration 150 m/s
2
at 10 to 2,000 Hz
Mechanical Data
6
cycles
Protection IP54
Electrical Data
Power supply 5 V
Non-linearity 0.5 %
Max. current 12 mA
Connector loom
ASL 0-06-05SA-HE
F 02U 000 226-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 Gnd
Pin 3 Sig
Pin 4 -
Sleeve DR-25
Wire size AWG 24
quest.
Installation Notes
wire at all times.
page.

4
Dimensions

4

4
Brake Control 5

ABS 374

ABS M4 Kit
Features
u Suitable for front-wheel, rear-wheel and four-
wheel drive vehicles
The ABS M4 kit is developed for the operation in front-,
rear- or 4-wheel drive vehicles. A vehicle specific wire
harness is included in the kit. The ABS M4 is specifically
adapted for motorsports use. Individual car parameters
can be calibrated with software free of charge.
Variations
ABS M4 Kit 1 ABS M4 Kit 2
Customer specific wire harness
with motorsport connectors,
wheel speed sensors with pro-
duction-type connectors
Customer specific wire harness
with motorsport connectors,
wheel speed sensors with mo-
torsport connectors
Mechanical Data
Hydraulic unit with attached ECU
Vibration damped circuit board
38 pin connector
2 hydraulic valves per wheel
2 brake circuits (front and rear)
2 hydraulic high pressure pumps
2 hydraulic accumulators 3 cm
3
/each
Standard fittings 2 x master cylinders M12 x 1
4 x brake cylinders M10 x 1
Size 125 x 80.3 x 129.6 mm
Weight 1,850 g
Max. shock 50 g less than 6 ms
Electrical Data
Supply voltage 8 to 16 V, max. 26 V for 5 min
Max. peak voltage 35 V for 200 ms
Power consumption 8 W stand-by, 230 W in opera-
tion
Inputs
4 active wheel speed DF11
Brake pressure (front brake circuit)
Longitudinal acceleration
Lateral acceleration
Yaw rate
Brake light switch
12 position function switch: 9 switch positions pre-
configured
2 switch positions pro-
grammable
1 switch position for ABS
function OFF
Outputs
ABS warning light (MIL)
Control of internal ABS valves
Control of pump motor
Optional Accessories
Additional package ASR (Trac-
tion control), includes software,
map switch and CAN module
on request
Additional package EBD (Elec-
tronic Brake force Distribution)
on request
Communication interface
MSA Box II
F 02U V00 327-01
Wheel speed signal splitters:
Single, without connec-
tors
F 02U V00 225-01
Single, motorsport con-
nectors
F 02U V00 209-01
Quad, 2 motorsport con-
nectors
F 02U V00 203-03
Quad, 1 motorsport con-
nector
F 02U V00 335-03
Communication
CAN interface
Content of Kit
Hydraulic unit with attached ECU
Pressure sensor
374 | Brake Control | ABS

5
Yaw/acceleration sensor
12 position function switch
4 wheel speed sensors DF11 standard
ABS warning light
Vehicle specific wire harness
Vibrations damping boards
ABS M4 Kit 1
ABS M4 Kit 2
Dimensions
Wheel Speed Sensor
Brake Control | ABS | 375

5
376 | Brake Control | ABS

5
Displays 6

Displays 378

Display DDU 7
Features
u Freely programmable dash logger
u Large trans-reflective multi colour display
u Light weight synthetic material housing
u Recording on USB flash drive (opt.)
The display DDU 7 integrates a programmable colour
dash board display with a data logging system for mo-
torsport applications. This allows for synchronized ac-
quisition and visualization of engine data from the ECU
and chassis data from 6 analogue and 4 digital input
channels. Additional input devices can be connected via
Ethernet and CAN buses. Recorded data from the inter-
nal 2 GB flash memory can be downloaded via high
speed Ethernet.
Application
Display 5,7 graphic colour dis-
play
12 user configurable
display pages
10 multicolor freely
configurable (RGB)
LEDs
Resolution 640 x 480 pixel
Supported image file formats Bmp, gif, jpg, png, tif
Converters 8 kHz AD converters with digital
low pass filter
Configurable math channels
User configurable CAN in/out messages
Sampling rate Max. 1,000 Hz for all channels
Online data compression
Logging rate Max. 100 kB/s
Recording channels Up to 720 per connected de-
vice
Logged data download speed Max. 1,000 kB/s
Internal storage capacity 2 GB
FM 40 long range telemetry support, GSM telemetry support
RS232 GPS input
CCP-Master, data acquisition from ECU that support CAN calibration
protocol (optional)
Mechanical Data
Size 148 x 126 x 32 mm
Weight 440 g
Issue 2008
Operating temperature internal -20 to 85C
Operating temperature Display -20 to 70C
sport.com)
Electrical Data
Max. power consumption (w/o
loads)
14 W at 14 V
Inputs
Page/brightness selection 2
Analog channels 6
Wheel speed inputs (Hall-effect) 4
Input range 0 to 5 V
Resolution 12 bit
Switchable pull up resistor 3 kOhm
DF 11 inputs On request
Outputs

Sensor supply 5 V 1 % (350
mA)
1
mA)
1
Environment
External switch for page selec-
tion, 12 steps
B 261 209 658-01
External switch for brightness ad-
justment or page selection, 6
steps
B 261 209 659-01
USB flash drive and connector are available on request
Software Upgrade 1
378 | Displays | Displays

6
USB-Port unlocked (Rugged USB
flash drive 2 GB Bosch File Sys-
tem (BFS) format included, works
with Bosch File System (BFS)
preformatted USB Flash drive on-
ly)
F 02U V01 133-02
Software Upgrade 2
CCP-Master (ASAP2 file from
ECU manufacturer required)
F 02U V01 134-01
Adapter cable to USB-Port inclu-
ded
F 02U V01 343-01
Adapter for wiring harness inclu-
ded
F 02U 002 996-01
Motorsport connector
AS 2-14-35PN at DDU7
37 pins
Mating connector
AS 6-14-35SN
F 02U 000 453-01
Installation Notes
The required software (.pst file) for this device is available in the
download area of our homepage www.bosch-motorsport.com.
Communication
CAN interfaces 2
Ethernet 100BaseT 1
Laptrigger input 1
RS232 Telemetry, GPS
Configuration via RaceCon Over Ethernet or MSA-Box II
Display DDU 7
Software Options
SW Upgrade 1
SW Upgrade 2
Displays | Displays | 379

6
Display DDU 8
Features
u Full programmable multi colour display
u 2 GB dash logger (opt.)
u Multi colour (RGB) gearshift lights
The display DDU 8 integrates a programmable full colour
dash board display with a data logging system for mo-
torsports applications. This allows for synchronized ac-
quisition and visualization of engine data from the ECU
and chassis data from up to 24 analogue and 4 digital in-
put channels. Additional input devices can be connected
via the ethernet and CAN buses. Recorded data from the
internal 2 GB logger (opt.) can be downloaded via high-
speed ethernet or via wireless connection with the
BT 60 burst telemetry system.
As a base system the DDU 8 is sold as display only. Soft-
ware upgrades for the DDU 8 (field upgradable by enter-
ing a key) activate data logger functionality, additional
recording on USB flash drive, CCP-master and additional
input channels.
Application
Display 5 graphic colour display
Multiple user configura-
ble display pages
10 multi colour (RGB)
gearshift lights
Resolution 800 x 480 high resolution pixel
Supported image file formats Bmp, gif, jpg, png, tif
low pass filter
Recording channels Up to 720 per connected device
3-port network switch
protocol (optional)
Mechanical Data
Size 161 x 111 x 31 (49) mm
Weight 675 g
Issue 2008
Operating temperature internal -20 to 60C
sport.com)
Electrical Data
loads)
14 W at 14 V
Inputs
Page/brightness selection 2
Analog channels 4
Resolution 12 bit
Switchable pull up resistor 3 k
Outputs
PWM outputs (Low side switch 2
A each)
4
mA)
1
Software
Configuration via RaceCon over Ethernet or MSA-Box II
Environment
External switch for page selec-
tion, 12 steps
B 261 209 658-01
External switch for brightness
adjustment or page selection, 6
steps
B 261 209 659-01
USB flash drive and connector are available on request.
ded
F 02U V01 343-01
ded
F 02U 002 996-01
Software Upgrade 1 F 02U V00 701-01

6
Activation of internal data logger 2 GB
Telemetry support BT 60
Long range telemetry support FM 40
Interface for telemetry (on yel-
low connector)
RS232
Yellow connector unlocked
GPS input
Additional analog channels 20
Additional rotational channels
(Input Hall/inductive)
4
Additional sensor supplies 5 V
1 % (350 mA each)
3
Additional sensor supply 10 V
1 % (350 mA)
1
Additional sensor supply 12 V (1
A) non regulated
1
Interface for GPS RS232

tem (BFS) format included,
works with Bosch File System
(BFS) preformatted USB Flash
drive only)

Motorsport connectors, double
density
2 x 41 pins
Mating connector (red)
AS DD 6-12-41SN
F 02U 002 216-01
Mating connector (yellow)
AS DD 6-12-41SA
F 02U 004 180-01
Installation Notes
Internal battery for data preservation included
Required service interval: 12 months (replacement of internal bat-
tery)
Communication
CAN interfaces 2
Ethernet 100BaseT 3
Lap trigger input (on yellow con-
nector, always open)
1
Display DDU 8
Software Options
SW Upgrade 1
SW Upgrade 2
SW Upgrade 3
SW Upgrade 4
Displays | Displays | 381

6

6
Data Logging Systems 7

Data Loggers 384

Lap Trigger Systems 390

Sensor Interfaces 395

Telemetry 407

Telemetry Accessories 416

Data Logger C 50
Features
u Freely programmable dash logger
u Light weight synthetic material housing
u One motorsports connector
The data logger C 50 is a data logging system for motor-
sport applications. It allows for synchronized acquisition
of engine data from the ECU and chassis data from 6 an-
alog and 4 digital wheel speed input channels. Addition-
al input devices can be connected via Ethernet and CAN
buses. Recorded data from the internal 2 GB flash mem-
ory can be downloaded via high speed Ethernet.
Application
low pass filter
RS232 GPS input
protocol (optional)
Mechanical Data
Size 148 x 126 x 16 mm
Weight 300 g
Issue 2008
Operating temperature (inter-
nal)
-20 to 60C
sport.com)
Electrical Data
loads)
14 W at 14 V
Inputs
Analog channels 8
Wheel speed input (Hall-effect) 4
Resolution 12 bit
DF11 inputs On request
Outputs

mA)
1
mA)
1
Environment
USB flash drive and connector are available on request
Software Upgrade 1
drive only)
F 02U V01 133-02
Software Upgrade 2
F 02U V01 134-01
ded
F 02U V01 343-01
ded
F 02U 002 996-01
384 | Data Logging Systems | Data Loggers

7
Motorsport connector
AS 2-14-35PN at C 50
37 pins
Mating connector
AS 6-14-35SN
F02U 000 453-01
Installation Notes
Communication
CAN interfaces 2
Ethernet 100BaseT 1
Lap trigger input 1
RS232 Telemetry, GPS
Configuration via RaceCon Over Ethernet or MSA-Box II
Data Logger C 50
Software Options
SW Upgrade 1
SW Upgrade 2
Data Logging Systems | Data Loggers | 385

7
Data Logger C 60
Features
u Compact and light weight data logger
u Aluminum housing
u Two motorsports connectors
The data logger C 60 is a compact and light weight data
logging system for motorsport applications. This allows
for synchronized acquisition of engine data from the
ECU and chassis data from up to 26 analog and 4 digital
input channels. Additional input devices can be connec-
ted via Ethernet and CAN buses. Recorded data from
the internal 2 GB flash memory can be downloaded via
high speed Ethernet or via wireless connection with the
BT 60 burst telemetry system.
As a base system the C 60 is sold as data logger only.
The software upgrades for the C 60 (field upgradable by
entering a key) activate additional recording on USB
Flash drive, CCP-Master and additional input channels.
Application
low pass filter
BT 60 WLAN burst telemetry support
RS232 GPS input
protocol (optional)
Mechanical Data
Size 105 x 34.5 x 137.5 mm
Weight 495 g
Issue 2008
Operating temperature (inter-
nal)
-20 to 65C
sport.com)
Electrical Data
loads)
10 W at 14 V
Inputs
Analog channels 6
Resolution 12 bit
Outputs
PWM outputs (low side switch 2
A each)
4
mA)
1
Environment
USB Flash drive and connector are available on request
Software Upgrade 1
GPS input
Additional analog channels 20
Rotational channels (input Hall/
inductive)
4
Additional sensor supply 5 V
(250 mA each)
3
Sensor supply 10 V (250 mA) 1
Sensor supply 12 V (1 A), non
regulated
1
RS232 GPS
F 02U V00 703-01
Software Upgrade 2
CCP-Master (ASAP 2 file from
F 02U V00 797-01

7
Software Upgrade 3
drive only)
F 02U V00 872-02
ded
F 02U V01 343-01
ded
F 02U 002 996-01
Motorsports connectors double
density
2 x 41 pins
Mating connector I
AS-DD 6-12-41SN
F 02U 002 216-01
Mating connector II
AS-DD 6-12-41SA
F 02U 004 180-01
Installation Notes
Communication
CAN interfaces 2
Ethernet 100BaseT 3
RS232 Telemetry
Lap trigger input 1
Data Logger C 60
Software Options
SW Upgrade 1
SW Upgrade 2
SW Upgrade 3

7
Upgrade USB
Features
u Capacity 2 GB
u Robust brass housing
u High performance push-pull connector
The Bosch Motorsport rugged USB flash drive is secure-
ly mounted within a rugged brass housing designed to
provide full protection against extreme environmental
conditions. The USB flash drive is IP68 protected and is
resistant to extreme operating temperatures (-30 to
85C). The USB flash drive is equipped with a rugged
protection cap.
The upgrade USB also contains an adapter cable to
USB-port and a connection socket to your wiring har-
ness.
Application
Tightening torque of Backnut for
connection socket
1.5 to 2.0 Nm
sport.com)
Mechanical Data
Housing material Brass
Weight 42 g
Length 72 mm
Electrical Data
Capacity 2 GB
Specification USB 1.1/2.0
Data rate USB 2.0 up to 480 MBit/s
Pin layout for connection to vehicle loom (see also Dimensions)
Pin 1 Data -
Pin 2 + 5 V
Pin 3 GND
Pin 4 Data +


7
Installation Notes
The USB flash drive should be fixed on a soft surface to reduce the
stress on the USB flash drive.
Required Software upgrades:
SW upgrade 1 for DDU 7 F 02U V01 133-02
SW upgrade 4 for DDU 8 F 02U V00 871-02
SW upgrade 2 for C 50 F 02U V01 134-01
SW upgrade 3 for C 60 F 02U V00 872-02
Rugged USB flash drive
Adapter cable to USB port
Connection socket to wiring harness
Dimensions

7
Lap Trigger HF 58 Receiver
Features
u High reliability, even in bad weather conditions
u 16 independent channels
u Main and sub trigger
This lap trigger system HF 58 consists of a high frequen-
cy transmitter station and a receiver which is installed in
the car.
The system allows an exact lap time measurement. Sec-
tion time measurement for comparison of different car
setups is also available if several transmitters are used.
Application
Antenna gain 6 dBi
Angle azimuth 40
Angle elevation 90
Sensitivity -60 dBm
Packet size 32 Bit
Packet repetition frequency 0,5 ms
Working frequency band 5,795 to 5,815 GHz
Frequency channels 16
Output driver (switching to
GND)
10 mA
Output signal main trigger (Puls) 20 ms active low
Output signal sub trigger (Puls) 40 ms active low
Max. vibration Vibration Profile 1
Functions
The transmitter sends coded signals across the race
track via the directional antenna. The receiver at the
race car permanently checks the team code and the sig-
nal parameters. If the trigger condition is detected, the
receiver generates the appropriate output signal
(main/sub trigger).
The trigger point is located at broadside of the transmit-
ter antenna. After detecting the trigger point and releas-
ing the trigger signal the receiver is passive for a period
of 0.5 seconds avoiding a multiple trigger signal. When a
trigger is detected the output pin goes low for a certain
time:
-20 msec low at main trigger
-40 msec low at sub trigger
Standard output configuration: Low side switch with in-
ternal pull-up (R = 2.5 kOhm to +5 VDC). External pull-
up to VBat allowed
Mechanical Data
Weight 127 g
Issue 2008
Ambient temperature -20 to 85C
Electrical Data
Power consumption 1.3 W
Connector ASX0-02-03PN
Pin 1 Power supply +
Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 Trigger out
Installation Notes
The white antenna radome must be turned to the transmitter side (see
Dimensions) and must not be mounted behind metallic covers or car-
bon fiber filled elements.
Positioning of the receiver inside the car: The connector side has to be
positioned in direction to the front or back of the car as shown in
drawing No. 2 (see Dimensions). It must not be positioned with the
connector pointing up- or downwards.
Green or blue indicator flashes when it detects a trigger condition.
Lap Trigger HF 58 Receiver
390 | Data Logging Systems | Lap Trigger Systems

7
Dimensions
Data Logging Systems | Lap Trigger Systems | 391

7
Lap Trigger HF 58 Transmitter
Features
u High reliability, even in bad weather conditions
u 16 independent channels
u Main and sub trigger
u Internal Li-ion battery optional
u External supply possible
This lap trigger system HF 58 consists of a high frequen-
cy transmitter station and a receiver which is installed in
the car.
The system allows an exact lap time measurement. Sec-
tion time measurement for comparison of different car
setups is also available if several transmitters are used.
Application
Working frequency band 5,795 to 5,815 GHz
Frequency channels 16
Angle azimuth 11
Angle elevation 90
Transmission power +10 dBm
Antenna gain 15 dBi
Side lobe suppression >30 dB
Functions
The transmitter sends coded signals across the race
track via the directional antenna. The receiver at the
race car permanently checks the signal parameters. If
the trigger condition is detected, the receiver generates
the appropriate beacon signal (main/sub trigger). The
trigger point is located at broadside of the transmitter
antenna.
Mechanical Data
Size 70 x 340 x 100 mm
Weight 1,020 g
Issue 2008
Ambient temperature -20 to 60C
Option: internal accumulator
Additional weight 350 g
Charging time < 4 h
Running time Approx. 30 h
Electrical Data
Power consumption 1.5 W
Pin 1 Power supply +
Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 Charge input +
Pin 4 n.c.
Pin 5 n.c.
Installation Notes
The white antenna radome points to the car as shown in the drawing
(see Dimensions) and must not be mounted behind metallic covers or
carbon fiber filled elements.
Red LED shows low battery condition.
Charge control shows: blue when charging
green when battery full
red on power or battery
failure
Lap Trigger HF 58 Transmitter
Lap Trigger HF 58 Transmitter with internal battery
and charger
Dimensions

7
Lap Trigger IR-02 Receiver
Features
u Infrared
u 39 g
u 15 m working range
u Different connectors available
This lap trigger system consists of an infrared transmit-
ter station and a receiver installed in the car. The sys-
tem allows an exact lap time measurement.
Section time measurement for comparison of different
car setups is also available if several transmitters are
used.
The receiver output signal pin is switched to ground for
20 ms when the car passes the main transmitter.
Notice: our old lap trigger IR is not compatible with
IR-02. If both lap triggers are used at the same time, the
transmitters have to be positioned with a minimum dis-
tance of 5 m.
Mechanical Data
Weight 39 g
Aluminum housing
Electrical Data
Frequency codes 16
Output voltage 5 V
Working range 15 m
Working temperature -25 to 70C
Pin 1/A V+ (Battery voltage)
Pin 2/B GND
Pin 3/C Trigger signal
Installation Notes
Same height between receiver and transmitter
Visibility connection between receiver and transmitter
Avoid direct exposure to sunlight
IR-02 Receiver KPSE 6E8 3AP DN A34
IR-02 Receiver ASL-6-06-05PD-HE
Order number B 261-206 887-01
IR-02 Receiver KPTA 6E6-4P-C-DN
Data Logging Systems | Lap Trigger Systems | 393

7
Lap Trigger IR-02 Transmitter
Features
u Infrared
u 124 g
u 15 m working range
This lap trigger system consists of an infrared transmit-
ter station and a receiver installed in the car. The sys-
tem allows an exact lap time measurement.
Section time measurement for comparison of different
car setups is also available if several transmitters are
used.
The receiver output signal pin is switched to ground for
20 ms when the car passes the main transmitter.
Notice: our old lap trigger IR is not compatible with
IR-02. If both lap triggers are used at the same time, the
transmitters have to be positioned with a minimum dis-
tance of 5 m.
Mechanical Data
Size with diode 90 x 40 x 28 mm
Weight 124 g
Aluminum housing
Electrical Data
Frequency codes 16 plus 16 offset codes for sec-
tion times
Working range 15 m
Working temperature -25 to 70C
Installation Notes
Same height between receiver and transmitter
Visibility connection between receiver and transmitter
Avoid direct exposure to sunlight
Lap Trigger IR-02 Transmitter

7
CAN Module
Features
u 8 high speed analogue channels 12 bit, voltage
range 0 to 5 V
u CAN identifiers configurable
u Sampling rate of 1100 Hz
u 120 Ohm CAN bus terminating resistor selectable
on-board
The CAN Modules are designed to expand the number of
the channels available on a logger. The linearization of
the channels can be made directly from the acquisition
system so no additional software is necessary. You can
install up to 32 of these modules on the vehicle using
different CAN IDs.
Mechanical Data
Weight 70 g
CAN parameters
Continuous transmission of CAN identifiers with rates configurable 1
Hz to 1 KHz at 1 Mb/s or at 500 Kb/s.
BUS data:
0xADD1 AN0AN3
0xADD2 AN4AN7
0xADD4 Temperature, Vext /2, DIAG
Diagnostics
Diag1 = Vref (1/2 of the Vout value, used to supply external devices)
Diag2 = board temperature
Temperature value T = ((Temp*5000/4096)-500)/10 [C]
Software Filtering: Analogue inputs have IIR LP 1 order filter selecta-
ble in 1 to 100 Hz range.
Transmission parameters (address and transmission frequency) on
CAN bus are software switchable.
A PC software program is available to set configuration parameters
and directly set-up Smart Capture Devices on field.
Data structure
All acquired data are available on CAN with the following IDs (ADD1,
ADD2, ADD3, ADD4 with DLC=8)
Data bus details
Analog inputs
Analog inputs are in counts on 12 bit (0 -> 0 mV, 0x1FFF -> 5000 mV)
1 bit is 1.22 mV
All analog inputs have a low pass hardware filter at 100 Hz and an IIR
pole software configurable in range 1 to 100 Hz.
PC Software
Modules are pre-configured by Bosch Motorsport.
Pin configuration
Connector on Module AS12-35PN
Pin Function
1 Power Supply 12 V
2 CAN H
3 CAN L
4 Power Supply Ground
5 Close CAN (Bridge with Pin2)
6 12 V out Sensors (protected)
7 Reference Voltage 5 V/50 mA
8 Reference Voltage 5 V/50 mA
9 Analogue channel 1
17 Analogue ground
18 Analogue ground
19 Not used
Data Logging Systems | Sensor Interfaces | 395

7
20 Not used
21 Not used
22 Not used
CAN Module
396 | Data Logging Systems | Sensor Interfaces

7
Extended Module EM-LIN
Features
u LIN Master
u 53 g
The extended module EM-LIN is a LIN-Master designed
to allow an on-line adjustment of the alternator regula-
tor parameters e.g. alternator voltage, load response
time, cut-off speed and current limitation.
The EM-LIN is designed with a microcontroller in combi-
nation with a LIN and a CAN transceiver. The electronics
power supply is managed by a voltage regulator. In addi-
tion, an analog input is accessible on one connector. Its
robust aluminum housing provides an effective protec-
tion for the electronics.
Further functions (e.g. CAN function) and application
specific software development is available on request.
Functions
Application LIN Master
Compatible regulator type Bosch LIN-regulator CR652
Mechanical Data
Size 85 x 32 x 17.3 mm
Weight 53 g
sport.com)
Electrical Data
Power Supply 12 V
Max. power supply (1 min) 25 V
Connector 1 (red) ASU 0-03-05PN-HE
Mating connector
ASU 6-03-05SN-HE
F 02U 000 407-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 -
Pin 4 -
Pin 5 Config
Connector 2 (green) ASU 0-03-05SD-HE
Mating connector
ASU 6-03-05PD-HE
F 02U 000 399-01
Pin 1 U
S
Pin 2 GND
Pin 3 LIN
Please note: the EM-LIN must be powered by one connector only.
Installation Notes
Please ask for compatibility of this CAN Module with your ECU.
Extended Module EM-LIN

7
Dimensions

7
Lambdatronic LT4
Features
u Supply of 4 Bosch lambda sensors, type LSU ADV
The Lambdatronic LT4 provides controlled pumping cur-
rent to supply up to 4 Bosch lambda sensors, type
LSU 4.2, LSU 4.9 or Mini-LSU 4.9. The lambda value, the
sensor temperature and diagnostics are available via
CAN and analog signal.
The LSU contains a Nernst and a pump cell. The lambda
in the Nernst cell is controlled to lambda = 1.013 inde-
pendent of the oxygen contents on the emission side,
through a current through the pump cell. The current
proportional output voltage of the IC is a measure of the
lambda value.
The main feature and benefit of this unit is the combina-
tion of the Bosch well known lambda IC and a very com-
pact box size with motorsports specification. Further-
more the analog signal output can be configured freely.
Functions
Application Lambda 0.75 to 10.12
Compatible Bosch sensor type LSU 4.2, LSU 4.9, Mini-LSU 4.9
Channels 4
Heater Internal
Mechanical Data
Sealing 100 % humidity
Mounting Velcro
Size w/o wire (w*l*h) 54 x 59 x 13 mm
Operating temp. range (housing) -20 to 85C
sport.com)
Electrical Data
Power supply U
S
(6.5) 10 to 14 V
Max power supply (1 min) U
S
Max. 26 V
Thermal dissipation loss 3 W at 14 V
Current Is 5 A
Current Is (Heating up) 26 A
Software
Configuration with Modas Included
Characteristic
Signal output 1 CAN
Signal output 2 4 x 0 to 5 V analog
CAN- baud rate 500 kbaud or 1 Mbaud
Signal resolution 2,5 * 10-4 lambda
Signal sampling rate 100 Hz
CAN refresh rate 100 Hz
Connector loom
AS 1-14-35SN
F 02U 000 355-01
Sleeve Viton
Wire size 26
Wire length L 20 cm
Pin Assignment
Pin Function
1 + 12 V (Battery +)
2 + 12 V (Battery +)
3 Ground (Battery -)
4 Ground (Battery -)
5 K-Line diagnostic connection
6 CAN1 + (high)
7 CAN1 (low)
8 Analog out 1
9 Analog out 2
10 Analog out 3
11 Analog out 4
12 Reference GND for analog out
13 Shield
14 Pump current LSU 1 IP1
15 Virtual GND LSU 1 VM1
16 Heater PWM LSU 1 Uh-1

7
17 Heater (Batt +) LSU 1 Uh+1
18 Setup current LSU 1 IA1
19 Nernst voltage LSU 1 UN1
23 Heater (Batt. +) LSU 2 Uh+2
29 Heater (Batt +) LSU 3 Uh+3
35 Heater (Batt. +) LSU 4 Uh+4
Installation Notes
The LT4 is designed to supply 4 Bosch lambda sensors, type LSU 4.2,
LSU 4.9 or Mini-LSU 4.9
The unit can be connected to any CAN system (500 kbaud or 1
Mbaud) and analog measuring device.
To avoid signal errors, a cable length of maximum 1.5 m between sen-
sor and box is recommended.
The unit is secure from miss-pinning.
The reference ground (GND_REF) has to be connected either to the
measuring device or to the system ground.
A ground offset of 2 V (max.) between GND and GND_REF has not to
be exceeded.
See the LT4 function sheet for software documentation (e.g. CAN pro-
tocol).
page.
Communication
Communication link K-Line / CAN
Lambdatronic LT4

7
Dimensions

7
Modular Sensor Interface M 60
Features
u Compact sensor interface
u 30 input channels
u Each channel individually configurable
The M 60 is a compact and light weight sensor interface
unit for analog and digital sensors. Up to eight M 60 can
be used to expand the number of input channels of the
data logger C 60 as well as the display DDU 8. The M 60
are linked via high-speed Ethernet interface. This allows
for synchronized acquisition of data from the different
units and the ECU.
The M 60 offers 26 analog inputs, four rotational inputs,
four pwm outputs and two independent CAN buses.
Each analog input channel features an analog pre-filter,
8 x oversampling and highly linear digital filtering. The
cut-off frequency of the digital filter is automatically ad-
justed to match the acquisition rate. The latency of the
digital filters is corrected during recording, yielding zero
filter delay in the recorded data.
The evaluation of each M 60 measurement channel is in-
dividually configurable with the PC configuration tool
RaceCon.
Application
8 kHz AD converters with digital low pass filter
Max. 1,000 Hz acquisition rate for all channels
RS232 GPS input
protocol (optional)
Mechanical Data
Size 105 x 34.5 x 137.5 mm
Weight 495 g
Max. vibration Vibration Profile 1 (See Appen-
sport.com)
Electrical Data
loads)
10 W at 14 V
Inputs
Analog channels 26
Resolution 12 bit
Rotational channels (default
Hall, Inductive as option)
4
Outputs
PWM outputs (low side switch 2
A each)
4
Sensor supply 5 V (350 mA
each)
4
Sensor supply 10 V (350 mA
each)
1
Sensor supply 12 V (1 A, non
regulated)
1
Environment
Software Upgrade 1
CCP-Master (ASAP 2 file from
F 02U V01 012-01
Motorsports connectors double
density
2 x 41 pins
Mating connector I
AS-DD 6-12-41SN
F 02U 002 216-01
Mating connector II
AS-DD 6-12-41SA
F 02U 004 180-01
Installation Notes
Communication
CAN interfaces 2
Ethernet 100BaseT 3

7
Modular Sensor Interface M 60
Software Options
SW Upgrade 1

7
Wheel Speed Signal Splitter
Features
u ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Interface
u Lightweight Aluminum Housing
Bosch Motorsport has developed a wheel speed module
that converts the Bosch DF11 (differential dual hall sen-
sors) signals to a signal that can be processed by pe-
ripheral engine controlling devices and data recording
systems. The adapter can be plugged into any Bosch
ABS M4 loom.
The operation principle is that it forwards the sensor in-
formation to the ABS. In addition it converts the speed
info into a digital signal. The type of output is open col-
lector. The connected device needs to contain an inter-
nal pull up resistor of 2.15 k to 12 V like the MS 4-
ECUs.
The interface is available in two different housings sup-
porting one connector or two connectors (see photo).
The single connector type is used if the signal is fed
back into an especially pre-defined ABS loom which con-
nects e.g. to the original chassis loom. The double con-
nector type is used if the speed signal is broadcast to
the peripheral device via a separate loom.
Application
Application ABS wheel speed sensor inter-
face
Compatible sensor type Bosch DF 11
Mechanical Data
Weight 53 g
Size (Single connector type) 101.8 x 63.5 x 30.3 mm
Size (Double connector type) 112.1 x 63.5 x 30.3 mm
sport.com)
Electrical Data
Power supply 12 V
Max. power supply (1 min) 25 V
Connector for Single Connector Type
Connector 1 (wide) AS-012-35-PN
Mating connector AS-612-35-SN
Connectors for Double Connector Type
Connector 1 (wide) AS-012-35-PN
Connector 2 (small) AS-008-35-PN
Pinout Connector 1 (wide)
Pin Description for one connec-
tor
Description for two connec-
tors
1 Supply to DF11 (RR) Supply to DF11 (RR)
2 Signal from DF11 (RR) Signal from DF11 (RR)
3 Supply to DF11 (RL) Supply to DF11 (RL)
4 Signal from DF11 (RL) Signal from DF11 (RL)
5 Supply to DF11 (FR) Supply to DF11 (FR)
6 Signal from DF11 (FR) Signal from DF11 (FR)
7 Supply to DF11 (FL) Supply to DF11 (FL)
8 Signal from DF11 (FL) Signal from DF11 (FL)
9 Signal to ABS (FL) Signal to ABS (FL)
10 DF11 supply from ABS (FL) DF11 supply from ABS (FL)
11 Signal to ABS (FR) Signal to ABS (FR)
12 DF11 supply from ABS (FR) DF11 supply from ABS (FR)
13 Signal to ABS (RL) Signal to ABS (RL)
14 DF11 supply from ABS (RL) DF11 supply from ABS (RL)
15 Signal to ABS (RR) Signal to ABS (RR)
16 DF11 supply from ABS (RR) DF11 supply from ABS (RR)
17 Open collector Signal to ECU
(FL)
Not used
(FR)
Not used
19 UBat 12V UBat 12V
(RL)
Not used

7
(RR)
Not used
22 ECU Ground Not used
Pinout Connector 2 (small)
Pin Description for one connec-
tor
Description for two connec-
tors
1 n.a. Open collector Signal to
ECU (FL)
ECU (FR)
ECU (RL)
ECU (RR)
5 n.a. Not used
6 n.a. ECU Ground
Single Connector Type
Double Connector Type
Dimensions
Single Connector Type Housing

7
Double Connector Type Housing
Connection Scheme

7
Online Telemetry System
Overview

The Bosch Motorsport Online Telemetry System enables
the transmission of online measurement data from a car
on a racetrack. The vehicle part of the system consists
of a data and the FM 40 telemetry transmitter. From the
data logger data is sent via a RS232 connection to the
FM 40. The FM 40 adds framing and error correction in-
formation to the data stream and modulates its RF out-
put which is fed via an antenna wire to the TX antenna.
In the pits, the RF signal is picked up by an RX antenna
connected to the pit receiver box. Inside the receiver
box, the signal is filtered and amplified by a low noise
filter amplifier. It is then sent to a UHF modem. The mo-
dem demodulates the data stream and performs error
correction, if necessary. The output stream passes the
data converter and is transferred via a connection wire
to the server PC in the garage. This PC decodes the
cars telemetry stream and distributes the information
over the pit network.
Due to the high transmission power of 1 to 10 W of the
Bosch FM 40 telemetry transmitter, near 100 % cover-
age is achieved on most tracks, even under race condi-
tions with high RF interference.
Application
Transmission of online measurement data
Components
Telemetry transmitter FM 40
Data logger, e.g. C 60
Pit receiver box
Functions
Good data quality even under race conditions with high RF interfer-
ence.
High transmission power of 1 to 10 W
Near 100 % coverage on most tracks
Framing and error correction
Environment
Car antenna
Pit antenna
Server PC
Ethernet pit network
Data Logging Systems | Telemetry | 407

7
Dimensions

Car Antenna Pit Antenna
Telemetry
Transmitter
Vehicle
System
Data Logger
Client PCs
Server PC
Pit Receiver Box
on pit roof
Ethernet Pit Network
RS 232
408 | Data Logging Systems | Telemetry

7
Telemetry Unit FM 40
Features
u 750 g
u 1 to 10 W transmission power
The FM 40 is a half-duplex radio modem suitable for re-
al-time telemetry transmission from a car on the race-
track.
The unit is offered in different hardware versions for
several frequency bands in the 430 to 470 MHz range.
Within the selected band, the transmission frequency is
software programmable in a 1 MHz range. The high RF
output power of up to 10 W gives excellent range and
good track coverage.
From the data acquisition system transmit data is fed in-
to the FM 40 via a RS232 interface. Typically the FM 40
is operated as an unidirectional telemetry transmitter.
For other applications, half duplex bidirectional opera-
tion is also possible.
Application
International standard I-ETS 300 220, ETS 300 113,
FCC
Mechanical Data
Size 151 x 138 x 28 mm
Weight 720 g
Housing with LED indicators
Car antenna compatible to existing Bosch telemetry systems.
2
at 20 Hz to 2 kHz
Electrical Data
Half duplex radio modem (bidirectional)
Internal data buffer and protocol management
Frequency range 430 to 470 MHz (hardware ad-
justable)
F(center) 1 MHz (software
programmable)
Transmission power 1 to 10 W
Receiver sensitivity -116 dBm error detection and
forward error correction (FEC)
RF channel bandwidth 12,5 kHz at 9.6 kbps
25 kHz at 19.2 kbps
Data interface RS232
Data rate 9.6 / 19.2 kbps
Required power supply 10 to 18 V
Max. current < 2,5 A
Operation temperature range 0 to 60C
RF BNC female
Power / data CGK SOT 8N35 PN
Telemetry Unit FM 40

7
Pit Receiver Box
The Pit Receiver Box integrates all electronic compo-
nents necessary to receive telemetry data from a car
equipped with a FM 40 transmitter in one weatherproof
package. Typically the receiver box is mounted on the
pit roof as close as possible to the RX antenna, thus
minimizing cable loss. The connection wire to the receiv-
ing PC in the garage, which can be up to 50 m long, also
supplies power to the Pit Receiver Box.
The Pit Receiver Box contains 1 to 4 UHF receivers fed
by a single RX antenna and low noise filter amplifier
(LNA). This enables parallel telemetry data reception
from up to 4 cars, provided transmitters need to oper-
ate in the same 2 MHz frequency band.
The Box is equipped with dual Ethernet port for redun-
dant Ethernet wire to the pit or for connection to a di-
rectional link (relay station).
Mechanical Data
Weight 4.2 kg
Size 330 x 280 x 180 mm
Max. distance receiver box to PC
(with F 020 V01 440-01
50 m
Working temperature range -20 to 50C
Electrical Data
Frequency range 400 to 470 MHz
Working frequency band fc 1 MHz
Channel spacing 12.5/25 kHz
Sensitivity -116 dBm at BER 10-3
Serial interface RS232 (19.2 kBit/s, no parity, 8
data bit, 1 stop bit, no flow con-
trol)
Radio data rate 19.2 kbps (25 kHz channel)
9.6 kbps (12.5 kHz channel)
Communication 2 x 10 / 100 Mbit ethernet
Power consumption 10 W
Data and power connector Motorsports type
Antenna connector BNC (Jack) 50
Package Parts
Box
48 V power supply
Pit Receiver Box
Dimensions
Splitter LNA
UHF Modem 1
UHF Modem 2
UHF Modem 3
UHF Modem 4
Power Supply
Module
Ethernet
Interface
Connector to
Antenna
Connector to
Relay
Directional Link
Ethernet #1
Connector to
Telemetry Server
Power Supply
Ethernet #2
Scheme Pit Receiver Box

7
Pit Receiver Package
+ -
Eth
The Pit Receiver Package contains everything that is re-
quired to start operation.
Package Parts
Pit Receiver Box (2 channels) F 02U V01 460-01
HF antenna wire (8 m) B 261 209 493-01
Rod antenna pit 7 dbi (2 m) B 261 208 867-01
Ethernet and power wire (50 m) F 020 V01 440-01
Ethernet and power injection
wire (1.5 m)
B 261 209 744-01
Telescopic aerial mast (7.7 m) B 261 208 873-01
Pit Receiver Package

7
Burst Telemetry System
Overview

The Bosch Motorsport Burst Telemetry System ideally
complements the FM 40 long range telemetry. High-res-
olution measurement data, as stored in the data logger
of the data acquisition system, is transferred automati-
cally to the pit server PC when the car passes the pits
or the car is in the garage. This gives two advantages:
high resolution measurement data is already available in
the pit network while the car is still out on track, ena-
bling instant analysis and saving valuable track time.
While the car is in the garage, the burst telemetry sys-
tem gives a significant handling advantage: measure-
ment data is transferred automatically to the pit server
PC, e.g. after engine test runs. The RF system operates
in the license-free 5.1 to 5.8 GHz ISM band. The 32 se-
lectable non-overlapping channels allow great flexibility
in channel selection. The robust OFDM transmission
scheme in combination with the high-quality band filter
yield excellent performance even in environments with
high RF noise. Typically good data reception can be ach-
ieved in a radius of approx. 300 m around the pit sta-
tion, depending on antenna location and track topology.
If necessary, reception range can be extended by an op-
tional remote receiver station. During the running lap,
the data acquisition system stores engine and chassis
data in non-volatile memory. When a laptrigger is re-
ceived, the current file is closed and data is prepared
for burst transmission. As soon as the car reaches the
reception range of the pit receiver, data transmission
starts automatically. An intelligent algorithm chooses
the lapfile to transmit and resumes transmission if the
link has been interrupted. Typically 6 Mbytes of meas-
urement data can be transferred per lap during a race.
The bi-directional transmission scheme ensures error-
free reception. Privacy of measurement data is ensured
by 128-bit WEP encryption.
Application
6 MB measurement per lap
Bidirectional transmission scheme
Privacy ensured by 128-bit WEP encryption
32 selectable non-overlapping channels
Operates in license-free 5.1 to 5.8 MHz band
Best reception 300 m around pit

7
Dimensions

Car Antenna
Ethernet Cable, up to 75 m
Burst Telemetry
Transmitter
Vehicle
System
Data Logger
Client PCs
Server PC
Burst Telemetry Receiver
on pit roof
Ethernet Pit Network
RS 232

7
Burst Telemetry Pit Module BR
60F
Features
u 1250 g
u +26 dBm transmission power
u Max. 3.5 W
The BR 60F pit module is the stationary component of
the Bosch Motorsport Burst Telemetry System. The high
gain omnidirectional antenna is mounted directly at the
receiver, minimizing wire loss. The weatherproof hous-
ing allows outdoor mounting of the unit, e.g. on the pit
roof. 12 V DC power and 100 MBit Ethernet connection
to the pit server PC is supplied via the connecting wire,
which can be up to 75m long. The system operates in
the 5.1 to 5.8 GHz ISM band and offers 32 non-overlap-
ping channels. The high quality band filter eliminates
out-of-band RF noise. This enables fully encrypted high
speed data transmission at 12 MBit under race condi-
tions. A directional antenna is available as an option.
Application
Radio air interface IEEE 802.11a
Wireless approvals FCC Part 15.247, IC RS210, CE
Encryptions WEP/WPA
Mechanical Data
Size (overall incl. antenna) 705 x 145 x 47 mm
Weight 1,250 g
Issue 2008
Max. vibration Vibration profile 1
Temperature range -20 to +85 C
Electrical Data
Radio modem Full duplex (bidirectional)
Receiver sensitivity -91 dBm at 12 Mbps
Frequency range 5.1 to 5.8 GHz ISM Band
Air data rate Typ. 12 (max. 54) Mbps
Data interface Ethernet TP10/100
Antenna Gain = 10 dBi; Omni directional
Max. power consumption 3.5 W
Rated current 0.25 A at 12 VDC
Interface connector AS008-35PA (Deutsch)
Mating connector AS608-35SA (Deutsch)
Legal Notes
This product contains open source software. For detailed information
see product documentation.
Burst Telemetry Pit Module BR 60F
Accessories
Radio modem (inclusive)
Antenna (inclusive)
Antenna filter (inclusive)
Fitting system (inclusive)
Interface cable to the pit PC (inclusive)

7
Burst Telemetry Car Module
BT 60F
Features
u 370 g
u +26 dBm transmission power
u Max. 3.5 W
The BT 60F car module is the vehicle component of the
Bosch Motorsport Burst Telemetry System. The com-
pact and lightweight unit receives measurement data via
a 100 MBit Ethernet connection from the data acquisi-
tion system and communicates with the pit module over
the RF antenna. The system operates in the 5.1 to 5.8
GHz ISM band and offers 32 non-overlapping channels.
An internal high quality band filter eliminates out-of-
band RF noise, which enables fully encrypted high
speed data transmission at 12 MBit under race condi-
tions. Online diagnosis and performance monitoring is
possible via the data acquisition system.
Application
Radio air interface IEEE 802.11a
Wireless approvals FCC Part 15.247, IC RS210, CE
Encryption WEP/WPA
Mechanical Data
Size 139 x 96 x 22 mm
Weight 370 g
Issue 2008
Max. Vibration Vibration profile 1
Electrical Data
Radio modem Full duplex (bidirectional)
Receiver sensitivity -91 dBm at 12 Mbps
Frequency range 5.1 to 5.8 GHz ISM Band
Air data rate Typ. 12 (max. 54) Mbps
Data interface Ethernet TP10/100
Antenna Gain = 3 dBi; Omni directional
Max. power consumption 3.5 W
Rated current 0.25 A at 12 VDC
Antenna connector SMA(f)
Interface connector AS008-35PA (Deutsch)
Mating connector AS608-35SA (Deutsch)
Legal Notes
This product contains open source software. For detailed information
see product documentation.
Burst Telemetry Car Module BT 60F
Accessories
Radio modem (inclusive)
Antenna 5 dBi (inclusive)
Antenna socket (inclusive)
Antenna cable (inclusive)

7
FM 40 Tester
The FM 40 Tester is used to check the performance of
telemetry components installed in the car which in-
cludes the FM 40 in conjunction with the RF wire and
the antenna. The FM 40 tester indicates RF output pow-
er as well as defective RF wires or car antennas ena-
bling quick detection of faulty components.
Electrical Data
Transmission power 1 to 15 (60) W
VSWR 1 to 6
Frequency band VHF / UHF
RF BNC male / female
FM 40 Tester
416 | Data Logging Systems | Telemetry Accessories

7
Telemetry Antenna Dummy
Load
The telemetry antenna dummy load replaces the teleme-
try car antenna when running the FM 40 transmitter in
the workshop or the garage. It reduces high power RF
radiation.
Electrical Data
RF power 15 W
VSWR 1.1
Frequency band VHF / UHF
Telemetry Antenna Dummy Load
Data Logging Systems | Telemetry Accessories | 417

7
Telemetry Car Antenna Single
Band
Rugged telemetry antenna for car mounting.
Frequency band UHF
Type
Pattern (hor.) omni
Length 150 mm
RF BNC male
Telemetry Car Antenna Single Band

7
Antenna Cable Kit
RF wire for the installation of telemetry antennas in the
car. Intended for single hole mounting.
Length Max. 2m (tbd.)
Drill hole diameter 12,5 mm
Attenuation Max. 0.7 dB at 2 m, 450 MHz
Antenna Cable Kit
Data Logging Systems | Telemetry Accessories | 419

7

7
Software 8

Calibration 422

Simulation 424

Analysis 426

Software Upgrades 428

Modas Sport
Features
u Calibration software tool for Bosch ECUs
Modas Sport is the calibration tool for Bosch Motor-
sport ECUs. It integrates a lot of meaningful features to
manage our engine control units at the dyno and the
racetrack.
Functions
Calibration tool for MS 3, MS 4.x, MS 5.x, MS 15, MS 3 Sport, MS 4
Sport, MS 15 Sport
Visualization, processing and management of calibration, measure-
ment and documentation data
Measuring system
Numeric data visualization
Bitwise, decimal, hexadecimal data visualization
Recording of measurement data (needs WinDarab to analyze)
Oscilloscope (graphic data visualization)
Calibration system
Visualization and manipulation of parameters (calibration data)
Parameter file manager
Data file manager (copy & compare)
Macro manager
Potiboard support integrated
Administration
Work base management
Integrated K-Line flashing tool
Intuitive design, easy to use, based on latest technology
Function requirements
PC
IBM PC compatible, min. 1.6 GHz
Approx. 512 MB RAM
Approx. 100 MB free hard disc space
VGA monitor (min. 1,024 x 768)
Operating systems
Windows XP 32 Bit, Vista 32/64 Bit, Windows 7 32/64 Bit
MSA-Box II F 02U V00 327-02
WinDarab Free data analysis
Software
On request
Communication
CAN (CCP), K-Line (KWP2000)
Modas Sport
Order number Free download at our homepage
422 | Software | Calibration

8
RaceCon
Features
u An all integrated software tool for configuration
and calibration
RaceCon is an all integrated software tool for configura-
tion and calibration of Bosch Motorsport hardware
products, such as ECUs, displays, loggers. The commu-
nication is based on Bosch Motorsport MSA-Box inter-
face.
Functions
Calibration of ECU maps and curves
ECU data file up- and download
Parameter file up- and download
Diagnostic functionality for Bosch Motorsport ECUs
Data file / Work base management
Integrated flash functionality
Integrated Bosch sensor database
Configuration of Bosch Motorsport displays
Configuration of Bosch Motorsport data loggers
Configuration of Bosch Motorsport DLS system
Configuration of Bosch Motorsport CAN modules
Communication via K-Line/CAN/Ethernet (KWP/CCP/XCP)
CAN communication log functionality (Baud rate changeable)
Quick data access over Race Mode
Intuitive design, easy to use
Environment
PC
IBM PC Pentium/AMD Athlon compatible, min. 1.6 GHz
Min. 2 GB RAM
Min. 1 GB free hard disc space
VGA/WGA monitor (min. 1,024 x 768)
MSA-Box II F 02U V00 327-02
RaceCon
Software | Calibration | 423

8
LapSim
Features
u Professional Simulation Tool
u Basic / Chassis / Engine Versions available
LapSim Chassis
is both an analysis tool as well as a vehicle simulation
program. By further processing the on-car recorded da-
ta, using parts of the simulation models, a much more
profound analysis of the vehicle behavior can be gained.
Due to the direct link with the simulation model, vehicle
parameters can be validated like aerodynamics, tire be-
havior, engine power, as well as driver performance. The
visualization of the vehicle behavior creates a much eas-
ier and better understanding of the influence of several
vehicle parameters on the performance independent of
the technical background of the user.
LapSim Engine
supplies an easy to use engine simulation package capa-
ble of generating a torque/power and a corresponding
ignition curves out of the main parameters of an engine.
The model is able to simulate any 4-stroke spark ignition
(SI) race engine currently seen on the market, with or
without air restrictor(s). To summarize, the engine soft-
ware is aiming for 95% accuracy but 5% the effort of
complex engine software packages. The engine software
avoids a vast number of variables in order to define ev-
ery engine detail, in order to improve usability as well as
computational performance. The engine package is inte-
grated in the lap simulation.
Functions
Data Analysis
Post processing of the on-car recorded data with simulation models.
Calculating vehicle handling state, aerodynamics, differential func-
tion, etc.
Determination of tire parameters out of on-car recorded data. Possi-
bility to analyze tire performance over the laps.
Direct comparison between several outings and/or simulation model.
3D Animation of vehicle behavior for a better and more thorough un-
derstanding.
By comparing recorded data with simulation data a validation possibil-
ity of vehicle parameters and vehicle functioning is made.
LapSim software adds all vehicle parameters to WinDarab Files and
creates automatic database.
Chassis Simulation model
Practical Pacejka like tire model. Tire parameters can easily be deter-
mined out of on-car recorded data. No tire data required.
Full vehicle model including limited slip (or visco-) differential
3D aero maps
Ride height dependent suspension kinematics
Calculation time 3-4 times faster than real car
(PVI - 3 GHz)
Automatic set-up optimization
Engine Simulation model
Engine model generates torque/power curve as well as ignition angle
Normally aspirated engines, with or without restrictor
2,3,4 and 5 valve cylinder heads
2-zone burn model in order to cope with all possible compression ra-
tios and chamber geometries
Ignition point is determined by adjustable maximum pressure in cylin-
der
Fully adjustable camshaft profile
Engine model generates pressure curve over 720 crankshaft, which
is integrated to calculate engine torque/power
10 seconds calculation time for 0 to 10,000 rpm range
LapSim Chassis Basic Version
LapSim Chassis License
LapSim Engine License
LapSim Chassis and Engine License
Upgrade LapSim Engine License
Upgrade LapSim Chassis License
Update LapSim Chassis or Engine
Update LapSim Chassis and Engine
424 | Software | Simulation

8
Dimensions
A few Screenshots
Software | Simulation | 425

8
WinDarab V7
Features
u State of the art user interface
u Versatile diagrams
u Numerous analysis functions
u Customizable mathematical channels and filters
u Software based license without dongle
WinDarab V7 is an evaluation tool for monitoring and an-
alyzing of logged data and is specially designed for mo-
torsports use. Monitor vehicle data using online teleme-
try and compare logged data by reading out your data
logger. WinDarab V7 features a state of the art user in-
terface and reads out both engine and chassis data.
The follower of WinDarab V6 offers simplified and ergo-
nomic handling as well as new features and a revised li-
cense system to work without a dongle.
Choose between the Free and the Expert version de-
pending on your purpose.
The enormous bandwidth of features makes WinDarab
V7 a perfect evaluation tool for motorsports engineers.
Functions
Diagrams
Oscilloscope
X-/Y-plot to create scatterbands
Histogram
3D-diagram
Analysis
Overlay of different laps
Time or distance based analysis
Absolute and relative values
One-touch channel statistics (min./max., avg., etc.)
Regression lines, user defined lines
Lap reports and lap based comparisons
Replay offline data in realtime
Advanced Analysis
User defined math channels
User defined conditions to filter data
FFT analysis
Racetracks
Racetrack creation based on v/acc or GPS data
Racetrack segmentation
Telemetry
Replay online data in realtime
Gauges for realtime visualization
User Interface
Flexible display setup and arrangement
Storable display setup and arrangement
Lap browser
Data Transmission
Direct data input without intermediate hardware
Protection/encryption of logged data files
ASCII import and export
License System
Dongle-free working in all WinDarab V7 variations
Activation/update via internet
Annual maintenance for up-to-date versions
Environment
PC
IBM PC Pentium/AMD Athlon compatible, min. 1.6 GHz
Min. 1 GB RAM
Min. 1 GB free HD space
VGA / WGA monitor (min. 1,024 x 768)
Operating systems
Variations
Free Expert
Max. open files 4 unlimited
Max. measuring data windows 2 unlimited
Max. areas in measuring data
windows
4 unlimited
Histogram + +
x/y-plot + +
Distribution + +
min/max-tables + +
Fourier-transformation + +
426 | Software | Analysis

8
Outing report + +
Lap analysis - +
Flowcharts - +
Instrument panel + +
User defined physical units + +
Racetrack generation via
speed/lateral G or GPS
+ +
ASCII export + +
Available operators for math
channels.
+, -, *, /, ^,
sqr (x), sqrt (x)
All
Extras settings/comments - +
Desktop load/save + +
Telemetry + +
Programming interface (API) - Opt.
WinDarab Free
WinDarab Expert
Software Options
Software licence API for WinDarab Expert
Software | Analysis | 427

8
CAN Bypass
Features
u Calculation in external Bosch CAN bypass ECU
u Connection to Non-Bosch ECU possible
u Interface binding via CAN (max. 1 Mbaud/s)
u Interface bandwidth depending on CAN
Develop your own software on a Bosch Motorsport ECU
for bypassing or support a host ECU via CAN or as
standalone ECU. CAN Bypass is a software development
environment based on Matlab/Simulink. It allows a sig-
nificantly speed algorithm development with option for
all MS 5.x ECUs, data loggers C 50 and C 60 and the MS
5.5 internal data logger. We deliver it with a full environ-
ment for Matlab/Simulink, an empty model with Bosch
Motorsport real time operating system library and a
package of Matlab/Simulink interfaces to all ECU I/Os.
Using a bypass ECU with software breakouts on host
ECU to calculate parts of host ECU functions on bypass
ECU or as standalone ECU e.g. for hybrid or transmis-
sion control.
General Functions
Support for generating executables that include algorithm, device-
driver and real-time operating system
Multitasking scheduling using time synchronous (and asynchronous)
tasks, task pre-emption, and temporary task overruns
Environment for Matlab/Simulink
Full I/O access with Bosch-Motorsport device drivers
Support for CAN bypass of MS 5.x ECUs. Break out signals with CAN
standard DBC file.
Bypass interaction between host ECU and bypass ECU via CAN (500
kBaud/s or 1 MBaud/s)
Calibration and measurement interface CCP via CAN or XCP via Ether-
net
Interface to Bosch data logging systems
SW-Download via Bosch Motorsport calibration tool RaceCon
Software option for all MS 5.1 ECU, dataloggers C 50 and C 60 and
MS 5.5 internal data logger available. For other MS 5.x ECUs on re-
quest.
Required and not included Software
MathWorks Requirements
MATLAB R2010b
Simulink
Real-Time Workshop
Real-Time Workshop Embedded Coder
Fixed-Point Toolbox
Simulink Fixed-Point
Stateflow
Stateflow Coder
Compiler
Freescale CodeWarrior Professional MobileGT
Operating Systems
Windows XP SP3, Windows 7 (64 Bit)
Development Hints
Depending on your experiences with SW-Development of Bosch Mo-
torsport ECUs we recommend SW-Development support from Bosch
Motorsport.
CAN Bypass for ECU MS 5.0
CAN Bypass for Datalogger C 50
CAN Bypass for Datalogger C 60
CAN Bypass for ECU MS 5.5 internal Datalogger
Services
Service Contract
The service contract extension is necessary at the begin-
ning of the second year of use. It has a runtime of one
year.
428 | Software | Software Upgrades

8
MSD Partitioning
Features
u Calculation directly in Bosch main ECU
u Communication binding via Software free cuts
u Fast connection to Bosch Software, solution for
time-critical calculations
u Unlimited bandwidth interfaces
u One Box Design (compact solution, no extra
weight)
Develop your own Software on a Bosch Motorsport
MS 5.x ECU. MSD Partitioning Single TGT is a software
option for all MS 5.x ECUs such as the MS 5.0, MS 5.1,
MS 5.2, MS 5.5. We deliver it with a full environment for
Matlab/Simulink, a compiled Bosch Motorsport model
as library, an empty model and real-time operating sys-
tem library and a package of Matlab/Simulink interfaces
to all ECU I/Os.
General Functions
Support for generating executables that include algorithm, device-
driver and real-time operating system
Multitasking scheduling using time synchronous (and asynchronous)
tasks, task pre-emption and temporary task overruns
Environment for Matlab/Simulink
Full I/O access with Bosch-Motorsport device drivers
Full read access to all Bosch signals
Development environment with reduced Bosch unit_blockset
Real time calibration
Calibration and measurement interface CCP via CAN or XCP via Ether-
net
SW-Download via Bosch Motorsport calibration tool RaceCon
Software option for all MS 5.x ECUs
Required and not included Software
MathWorks Requirements
MATLAB R2010b
Simulink
Real-Time Workshop
Real-Time Workshop Embedded Coder
Fixed-Point Toolbox
Simulink Fixed-Point
Stateflow
Stateflow Coder
Compiler
Freescale CodeWarrior Professional MobileGT
Operating Systems
Windows 7, 64 Bit SP1
Development Hints
Depending on your experiences with SW-Development of Bosch Mo-
torsport ECUs we recommend SW-Development support from Bosch
Motorsport.
MSD Partitioning
Services
Service Contract
Software | Software Upgrades | 429

8
430 | Software | Software Upgrades

8
Accessories 9

Communication Interface 432

Connector Opening Tool 433

PowerBox 434

Relay 438

Switches 440

Wiper Motor 441


MSA-Box II
Features
u Communication interface for PC-supported cali-
bration on K-line, CAN or Ethernet interface
The MSA-Box II is the low cost unit for PC-supported
calibration and configuration on Ethernet, K-Line or CAN
interface of an ECU.
The MSA-Box II is coupled to the PC via the USB inter-
face. This ensures a powerful and universal link to all
common PCs. The coupling to the ECU is effected via
Ethernet, K-Line or CAN-interface of the diagnosis inter-
face.
Mechanical Data
Temperature range 0 to 70C
Compact design
Fully suitable for motor vehicle use
All inputs and outputs to the PC with galvanic separation
Electrical Data
Input voltage (vehicle side) 8 to 32 V
Power supply through the connection to the ECU from board mains
with galvanic separation
Power consumption (powered
by USB)
Typ. 0.5 W
USB USB 2.0, high speed (480 MBit/
sec)
Ethernet 100 MBit/sec
K-Line 300 Bd up to 320 kBd
CAN 10 kBit/s up to 1 MBit/s
Operating Systems Windows XP 32 Bit, Vista 32 Bit
Connector
AS 6-12-35PN
F 02U 000 441-01
Mating connector
AS 0-12-35SN
F 02U 000 258-01
Pin 1 Terminal 30 (permanent pos)
Pin 2 Terminal 15 (switch pos)
Pin 3 GND
Pin 4 CAN_High
Pin 10 K-Line
Pin 8 RxD+
Pin 9 RxD-
Pin 11 TxD+
Pin 12 TxD-
Pin 16 CAN_Low
Pin 22 SCR
Diagnosis wire length 2 m
USB wire length 0.5 m
MSA-Box II
432 | Accessories | Communication Interface

9
Connector Opening Tool for
AS series
Features
u Quick and easy opening of ECU connectors
Mechanical Data
Material Stainless steel
Opening tool for shellsize 16
Opening tool for shellsize 18
Accessories | Connector Opening Tool | 433

9
PowerBox PBX 180
Features
u Advanced user interface
u CAN communication
u Reverse polarity protection
u Lightweight aluminum casing
u Current measurement on all channels
We designed the PowerBox for intelligent control and
distribution of the electric grid in a modern racing car. It
is capable to replace all conventional relays, fuses and
circuit breakers, simplifies wiring harnesses and pro-
vides diagnostic capabilities.
Mechanical Data
Size 191 x 176 x 36 mm
Weight 1,250 g
sors)
-10 to 85C
Electrical Data
Supply voltage range 6 to 20 V
Power supply current 180 A
Inputs
16 analogue inputs (12 bit resolution)
14 digital inputs
Outputs
2 very high power channels (up to 180 A inrush current, 20 A continu-
ous)
12 high power channels (up to 80 A inrush current, 20 A continuous)
2 high power PWM channels (20 A continuous)
26 low power channels (8 A continuous)
4 low power PWM channels (8 A continuous)
2 wiper channels (8 A continous)
4 tri-state digital channels
3 sensor supplies 5 V with individual ground pins
Warning light
Software
Real time clock
Connectors
Connector 1: Battery power sup-
ply
Deutsch ASHD0 14-1 PN
Connector 2: High power outputs Deutsch AS2 20-16 SN
Connector 3: Low power outputs Deutsch AS2 20-39 SA
Connector 4: Signal and Inputs Deutsch AS2 16-35 SN
Pin configuration
Connector 1 Battery Power Supply
Mating connector Deutsch ASHD6 14-1 SN C35
Order number connector housing F 02U 002 905-01
Notice: Depending on the cable used for power supply, one of the fol-
lowing pins is needed according to the diameter of the cable.
Order number pin for cable 16
mm
2
F 02U 002 906-01
mm
2
F 02U 002 907-01
mm
2
F 02U 002 908-01
Connector 2 High Power Outputs
Mating connector Deutsch AS6 20-16 PN
Order number connector F 02U 000 480-01
Pin Used for Max Rating / Peak (A) *)
A Channel 10 High Power 20 / 80
B Channel 2 Very High Power 20 / 180
C Channel 1 Very High Power 20 / 180
D Channel 9 High Power 20 / 80
E Channel 1 High Power 20 / 80
F Channel 5 High Power 20 / 80
G Channel 1 High Power PWM 20 / 80 (0 to 100% DC)
H Channel 2 High Power PWM 20 / 80 (0 to 100% DC)
J Channel 12 High Power 20 / 80
K Channel 4 High Power 20 / 80
L Channel 11 High Power 20 / 80
M Channel 3 High Power 20 / 80
434 | Accessories | PowerBox

9
N Channel 6 High Power 20 / 80
P Channel 2 High Power 20 / 80
R Channel 7 High Power 20 / 80
S Channel 8 High Power 20 / 80
*) Please note that the current draw per channel is limited by the con-
nector, not by the driver stages.
Connector 3 Low Power Outputs
Mating connector Deutsch AS6 20-39 PA
Pin Used for Max Rating / Peak (A) *)
A Channel Wiper 2 8 / 40
B Tri-State Output 2 Trigger 0 / 2.5 / 5 V
C Tri-State Output 4 Trigger 0 / 2.5 / 5 V
D Channel 25 8 / 40
E Channel 26 8 / 40
F Channel 23 8 / 40
G Channel 21 8 / 40
H Channel 22 8 / 40
J Channel 20 8 / 40
K Channel 14 8 / 40
L Channel 16 8 / 40
M Channel 18 8 / 40
N Channel 2 8 / 40
P Channel 4 8 / 40
R Channel 6 8 / 40
S Channel 8 8 / 40
T Channel 10 8 / 40
U Channel 12 8 / 40
V Channel 2 PWM 20 / 60 (0 to 100% DC)
W Channel 4 PWM 20 / 60 (0 to 100% DC)
X Channel Wiper 1 8 / 40
Y Tri-State Output 1 Trigger 0 / 2.5 / 5 V
Z Tri-State Output 3 Trigger 0 / 2.5 / 5 V
a Reserved -
b Channel 24 8 / 40
c Channel 19 8 / 40
d Channel 13 8 / 40
e Channel 1 8 / 40
f Channel 3 8 / 40
g Channel 7 8 / 40
h Channel 9 8 / 40
i Channel 11 8 / 40
j Channel 3 PWM 20 / 60 (0 to 100% DC)
k Channel 1 PWM 20 / 60 (0 to 100% DC)
m Power Ground
n Channel 15 8 / 40
p Channel 17 8 / 40
q Channel 5 8 / 40
r Power Ground
*) Please note that the current draw per channel is limited by the con-
nector not by the driver stages.
Connector 4 Signal and Inputs
Mating connector Deutsch AS6 16-35 PN
Pin Used for Comments
1 Digital Input 7 Trig high / low
9 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 CAN 2L
16 CAN 2H
17 Reserved
18 Reserved
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 CAN 1L
24 CAN 1H
25 Reserved
26 Reserved
27 Reserved -
Accessories | PowerBox | 435

9
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Analogue Input 16; 12 bit Pull-up 0 / 3.16 k / 47 k
32 Sensor Supply VREF2 5.0 V
33 Analogue ground
34 Analogue ground
35 Analogue ground
36 Analogue ground
41 Analogue ground
42 Warning Light at 5V, max. 0.5 A 5.0 V
Communication
2 CAN lines (64 input channels)
PowerBox PBX 180
436 | Accessories | PowerBox

9
Dimensions

Accessories | PowerBox | 437

9
Relay 25 A
Features
u 25 A max. current
The relay 25 A is a miniature DC-contactor for electrical
power control. The rated current is 25 A for secondary
power distribution with high inrush current like hydraul-
ic- and fuel motor loads. The base part allows a quick
change of the relay.
Mechanical Data
Drill hole 3.1 mm
Weight 61 g
Vibration 30 g/70 Hz to 3 kHz
Shock 100 g (11 ms)
Electrical Data
Power Supply 12 to 14.5 V
Min. switches 50,000
Coil resistance at 25C 80
Max. current 25 A
Current vs. Time characteristic
(the relay shall be compatible with a 25 A circuit break-
er)
I (A) t(s)
30 3,600 (1 h)
50 5
100 1.2
250 0.2
350 0.1
Relay 25 A
Order number Y 261 A20 597-01
Base
Order number Y 261 A20 598-01
438 | Accessories | Relay

9
Dimensions
Accessories | Relay | 439

9
Switches
We offer a wide range of switches for the special de-
mands of motorsport.
You can combine all types with every design and every
connector wire equivalent to your individual require-
ment.
Functions
For MAP function
For display toggle function
3 steps for MAP function
4 steps
4 steps for MAP function
6 steps for display switch-over
12 steps
Design
Straight
Angled 90
Options
With integrated resistor network
Lockable
Variable number of steps
Variable form of rotary waver switch
Without end stop
Please specify the required cable length with your order.

For MAP function
Straight, ASL 6-06-05PN-HE
6 steps for display switch-over
12 steps angled 90
Angled 90, KPTA 6E6-4P-C-DN
12 steps straight
440 | Accessories | Switches

9
Wiper Direct Actuator WDA
Features
u LIN and Analog versions available
The WDA is a wiper motor designed to execute reversing
movements instead of rotating 360 like a conventional
wiper.
Its function and many operating modes are managed by
integrated control electronics. The user is able to con-
trol the desired operating mode via LIN [Version LIN] or
simply by switching its analog inputs to ground [Version
Analog]. The gear, the motor and the electronics are all
installed in the same housing.
The main benefit of this wiper motor is its direct rota-
tion movement which replaces external gears and the
possibility of programming the operating speed and end
positions of all its function modes, upon request.
Application
Variations
WDA Analog
Operating modes:
Stop
Interval
Speed 1
Speed 2
WDA LIN
LIN speed 19,200 Baud
LIN Version 2.0
LIN description file On request
Operating modes:
Stop
Interval
Speed 1
Speed 2
Single stroke
Service position
Mechanical Data
Max. Vibration 30 % of Vibration Profile 1
or 100 % of Vibration Profile 1 in
combination with silentblocks
(see Accessories)
Size 104.7 x 174.7 x 117.1 mm
Max. wipe cycles/min Depending on wipe angle
Max. wipe angle 160
Max. torque 35 Nm
Weight 1,270 g
Electrical Data
Supply current at 40 cycles/min. Typ. 3.4 A
Supply current at 60 cycles/min. Typ. 6.3 A
Connector CEP2M-AMP-4
Various motorsport and automotive connectors available on request
Installation Notes
The WDA LIN can be operated by all ECUs with LIN 2.X Master func-
tion. Further information about the LIN-Frame available upon request.
The WDA Analog can be operated by switching the analog inputs be-
tween ground and voltage supply.
Please contact us to define the desired angle of all the operating
modes.
The acceleration values can be exceeded by using silentblocks
(F02U 003 027-01).
specifications.
page.
WDA LIN
WDA Analog
Accessories
Silentblock
Accessories | Wiper Motor | 441

9
Dimensions
442 | Accessories | Wiper Motor

9
Pin configurations
Accessories | Wiper Motor | 443

9
Wiring Harnesses
We offer special wiring harnesses for motorsport appli-
cations. Our portfolio contents layout, design and pro-
duction of harnesses, sensors and actuators for motor-
sport requirements.
Moreover we offer consultancy of loom design and sen-
sor definition. Design and production of prototypes up
to mass production is also possible. We do 2D Layout
documentation in exchangeable *.dxf, *.dwg file format.
Naturally we use motorsport connectors (sev. MIL
specs) and switches and fuses from aviation and aero-
space technology. Full shielded wires for maximum EMC
protection are available. All looms are built with cables
and wires in aviation & aerospace quality. All looms are
tested on a high voltage test bench. Tests under defined
vibration profiles are also possible. We also offer several
connectors on request.
Wiring Harnesses
444 | Accessories | Wiring Harnesses

9
Appendix 10


Vibration Profiles 447

General Information

ESD, Handling and Transport
Please be mindful of the specifications concerning ESD.
Never grab into the connectors. Please follow the regu-
lations when transporting devices (e.g. ESD packaging
materials).
Service
To ensure full functionality every time, Bosch Motor-
sport recommends annual functional testing of all equip-
ment.
Battery
Some of the devices use Lithium-Ion batteries. Please
use extra caution to be certain that the correct removal
procedure is followed. Abide by the maintenance cycle
schedule to ensure correct operation. Bosch Motorsport
recommends maintenance once a year.
Installation
The correct installation extends reliability and durability.
Please follow the specifications regarding temperature,
humidity, vibration and liquid compatibility.
446 | Appendix | General Information

10
Vibration Profile 1

Broadband noise: 8h/direction
Frequency (Hz) Acceleration density (m/s
2
)
2
/Hz
20 50.4
55 26.0
180 1.0
300 1.0
360 0.56
1,000 0.6
2,000 0.6
Effective value a
Eff
55.4 m/s
2
Sinus: 8h/direction
Frequency (Hz) Acceleration peak (m/s
2
)
100 50
180 200
250 200
350 60
2,000 60
Appendix | Vibration Profiles | 447

10
Vibration Profile 2

Broadband noise: 8h/direction
2
)
2
/Hz
10 10
50 10
66.7 1
100 1
1,000 0.1
Effective value a
Eff
26.9 m/s
2
448 | Appendix | Vibration Profiles

10
Vibration Profile 3

Broadband noise
2
)
2
/Hz
10 14.0
50 7.0
60 3.5
300 0.51
500 45.6
1,500 15.26
Effective value a
Eff
168 m/s
2
Sinus
Alteration rate of frequency: 1 oct./min
Frequency (Hz) Amplitude of accel-
eration (m/s
2
)
Amplitude of oscilla-
tion lane (m)
20 50
85 50
85 175
200 175
200 280
220 280
300 125
440 125
Appendix | Vibration Profiles | 449

10
450 | Appendix | Vibration Profiles

10
A
ABS M4 Kit ..................................................................374
Absolute Position Sensor APS-C .................................198
Acceleration Sensor AM 600-2 ....................................202
Acceleration Sensor AM 600-3 ....................................204
Acceleration Sensor MM5.10.......................................206
Alternator 90 A ............................................................178
Alternator B3 ...............................................................180
Alternator B3 LIN ........................................................183
Alternator GCM1 .........................................................186
Antenna Cable Kit .......................................................419
B
Burst Telemetry Car Module BT 60F ............................415
Burst Telemetry Pit Module BR 60F ............................414
Burst Telemetry System Overview...............................412
C
CAN Bypass .................................................................428
CAN Module ...............................................................395
Connector Opening Tool for AS series ........................433
Current Sensor CS 240 ...............................................200
D
Data Logger C 50 ........................................................384
Data Logger C 60 ........................................................386
Diesel System Components ..........................................40
Display DDU 7 .............................................................378
Display DDU 8 .............................................................380
Double Fire Coil 2x2 ....................................................128
Double Fire Coil 3x2 ....................................................131
E
Electronic Throttle Body ...............................................43
Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport ....................................14
Engine Control Unit MS 3 Sport GT3 Cup .....................16
Engine Control Unit MS 12 ............................................37
Engine Control Unit MS 15.1 .........................................33
Engine Control Unit MS 15.2 .........................................35
Engine Control Unit MS 4 Sport ....................................18
Engine Control Unit MS 5.0 ...........................................24
Engine Control Units Performance Line ........................21
Engine Control Units Sport Line ....................................11
Extended Module EM-LIN ............................................397
F
FM 40 Tester ...............................................................416
FPR Adaptor ..................................................................57
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini 38....................................51
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini 5......................................54
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini A .....................................49
Fuel Pressure Regulator Mini/Mini M.............................46
Fuel Pump FP 100 .........................................................61
Fuel Pump FP 165 .........................................................63
Fuel Pump FP 200 .........................................................65
Fuel Pump FP 300 .........................................................67
Fuel Pump FP 300L .......................................................69
G
Gear Shift Sensor GSS-2 .............................................215
General Information ....................................................446
H
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-D 90 ...............................321
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-M ...................................319
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-P ....................................309
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor HA-P2 ..................................311
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor Mini-HA-P ............................313
Hall-Effect Speed Sensor Mini-HA-P sealed .................317
HP Control Valve DSV ....................................................59
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-FCV/-FCV HP ...............................71
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-FD ...............................................73
HP Fuel Pump HDP 5-LW...............................................74
HP Injection Valve HDEV 5.2 LC ..................................174
HP Injection Valve HDEV 5.2 ........................................172
HPI 1.1 ..........................................................................75
HPI 5 .............................................................................76
HPI 5-M 4C ....................................................................77
HPI 5-M 8C ....................................................................79
I
Ignition Module IM 3.1 ................................................149
Ignition Module IM 3.2 ................................................151
Ignition Module IM 4 ...................................................153
Inductive Speed Sensor IA ..........................................325
Inductive Speed Sensor IA-C .......................................323
Inductive Speed Sensor IS ..........................................327
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-C .......................................329
Inductive Speed Sensor IS-T .......................................331
Injection Valve EV 12 ...................................................159
Injection Valve EV 14 ...................................................164
Injection Valve EV 14i ..................................................169
Injection Valve EV 6 .....................................................155
K
Knock Sensor KS-P ......................................................217
Knock Sensor KS-R......................................................219
L
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.9D ...........................................227
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.2 ..............................................221
Lambda Sensor LSU 4.9 ..............................................224
Lambda Sensor Mini-LSU 4.9 ......................................230
Lambdatronic LT4 .......................................................399
Lap Trigger HF 58 Receiver .........................................390
Lap Trigger HF 58 Transmitter ....................................392
Lap Trigger IR-02 Receiver ..........................................393
Lap Trigger IR-02 Transmitter ......................................394
LapSim........................................................................424
Lean Angle Sensor LAS-1 ............................................209
Linear Potentiometer LP 10 ........................................233
Linear Potentiometer LP 100 ......................................247
Linear Potentiometer LP 100F ....................................249
Linear Potentiometer LP 150 ......................................251
Linear Potentiometer LP 25 twin ................................237
Linear Potentiometer LP 50 twin ................................241
Linear Potentiometer LP 75F ......................................245
M
Modas Sport ...............................................................422
Modular Sensor Interface M 60 ...................................402
MSA-Box II ...................................................................432
MSD Partitioning .........................................................429
Index | 451

O
Online Telemetry System Overview .............................407
P
Pit Receiver Box ..........................................................410
Pit Receiver Package ...................................................411
PowerBox PBX 180 .....................................................434
Pressure Sensor Air PSA-B ..........................................253
Pressure Sensor Air PSA-C ..........................................256
Pressure Sensor Air PSB-2 ..........................................259
Pressure Sensor Air PSB-4 ..........................................262
Pressure Sensor Air PSP .............................................264
Pressure Sensor Air PST .............................................266
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSC-10 .....................................269
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSC-260 ...................................271
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSM .........................................273
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSM-S ......................................275
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-10 .....................................277
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-100R .................................281
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-10R...................................279
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-250R .................................283
Pressure Sensor Fluid PSS-260 ...................................285
Pressure Sensor Fluid PST-F .......................................287
Pressure Sensor Fluid PST-F 2 ....................................290
R
RaceCon ......................................................................423
Relay 25 A ...................................................................438
Rotary Potentiometer Mini-RP 100-M ..........................293
Rotary Potentiometer RP 100 twin ..............................303
Rotary Potentiometer RP 100/130/308 .......................301
Rotary Potentiometer RP 345-M..................................305
Rotary Potentiometer RP 360-H ..................................307
Rotary Potentiometer RP 50-M/130-M/350-M .............295
Rotary Potentiometer RP 55 ........................................297
Rotary Potentiometer RP 86 ........................................299
S
Single Fire Coil C90i-E10 .............................................146
Single Fire Coil C90i-E8 ...............................................143
Single Fire Coil C90i-pro .............................................140
Single Fire Coil P35 ......................................................87
Single Fire Coil P35-E10 ................................................96
Single Fire Coil P35-E8 ..................................................93
Single Fire Coil P35-T ....................................................90
Single Fire Coil P35-TE10 ............................................101
Single Fire Coil P35-TE8 ................................................98
Single Fire Coil P50/P50-M .........................................104
Single Fire Coil P65 .....................................................107
Single Fire Coil P65-E10 ..............................................116
Single Fire Coil P65-E8 ................................................113
Single Fire Coil P65-T ..................................................110
Single Fire Coil P65-TE10 ............................................122
Single Fire Coil P65-TE8 ..............................................119
Single Fire Coil PS ........................................................81
Single Fire Coil PS-T ......................................................84
Single Fire Coil S19 .....................................................134
Single Fire Coil S22/S22-T ..........................................137
Starter 1.4 kW.............................................................190
Starter 1.7 kW.............................................................192
Starter 2.0 kW.............................................................194
Switches .....................................................................440
T
Telemetry Antenna Dummy Load .................................417
Telemetry Car Antenna Single Band ............................418
Telemetry Unit FM 40 ..................................................409
Temperature Sensor NTC M12 ....................................341
Temperature Sensor NTC M12-H .................................343
Temperature Sensor NTC M12-L .................................345
Temperature Sensor NTC M5-HS.................................333
Temperature Sensor NTC M6-H ...................................335
Temperature Sensor PT 200E ......................................347
Temperature Sensors Infrared TI-100-s/-c ...................351
Temperature Sensors Infrared TI-16-r/-s .....................349
Thermocouple Probe TCP K ........................................353
Thermocouple Probe TCP KA ......................................355
Thermocouple Probe TCP KN 2 ...................................358
Twin Single Fire Coil 2x1 .............................................125
U
Upgrade USB...............................................................388
V
Vibration Profile 1 .......................................................447
W
Wheel Speed Signal Splitter ........................................404
WinDarab V7 ...............................................................426
Wiper Direct Actuator WDA .........................................441
Wire Potentiometer WP 100 ........................................366
Wire Potentiometer WP 35 ..........................................360
Wiring Harnesses ........................................................444
Y
Yaw Rate Sensor YRS 3 ...............................................212
452 | Index

Bosch Engineering GmbH
Motorsport
For more information please visit
www.bosch-motorsport.com
or send an email to
motorsport@bosch.com
Bosch Engineering GmbH, 2013
Modifcations reserved.
B
o
s
c
h

M
o
t
o
r
s
p
o
r
t

|

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

2
0
1
4

Bosch Catalog - Edition 2014

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bosch Catalog - Edition 2014

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bosch Catalog - Edition 2014

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bosch Motorsport

Equipment for High Performance Vehicles

You might also like